Home

6 - GE Intelligent Platforms: Support Home

1. SSSSSSSe The PSHALM 1 and POPALM 1 commands will provide for the displaying or removing from display respectively alarm page 1 Two commands separated by a space are assigned to function key 9 The first of these ACK_ALARM is used to acknowledge all currently unacknowledged alarms The second command PLCSETW Z1 0 sets our temperature reading to 0 Note that a command script containing these two commands could also have been used here rather than defining both commands in the key assignments field The PSHSCN 100 command assigned to function key 14 is used to display the OPTIONS screen 100 on the target terminal display GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 139 Interacting With an Alarm Page Now that we have completed our system we need to save it both to disk and to the ADC module then execute it as we originally did back in steps 20 through 22 Use the Esc key to return to the Builder s main menu and select Load Save Operations Then consecutively execute menu items Save system to disk Refresh system in RAM and Execute system in RAM Once the startup screen is displayed press the VIEW ALARM PAGE touch area to view alarm page 1 7 Apr 88 18 59 37 100l l UALUE ALARM EXAMPLES VALVE IS 0PEN Cstatus style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style UIEW CLOSE ACK OPTIONS ALARM ALARM ALL MENU Li PAGE PAGE ALARMS
2. 44A726758 205RI Lithium Battery A lithium battery IC697ACC701 is installed as shown in Figure 2 1 This battery maintains user memory when power is removed from the PLC Ifa low battery is detected it is reported in the PLC fault table Chapter 2 Getting Started Series 90 70 PLC Users Ann Figure 2 1 Series 90 70 ADC Module 2 3 When replacing a battery be sure to install the new battery in the unused battery connector before removing and discarding the old battery Note When the ADC will be stored for an extended period of time the battery should first be disconnected However if it is to be stored as a spare for a running application you may wish to retain memory already stored on the module If this is the case you would keep the battery connected The shelf life of the lithium battery when not connected on the ADC is 10 years at 20 C 68 F If the battery is connected on an ADC module to retain memory while the module is being stored the life of the battery is about 6 months without power applied Caution Do not discard the lithium battery in fire Do not attempt to recharge the battery Do not short the battery The battery may burst or burn or release hazardous materials Three LED Indicators The three LED indicators as sho
3. There are several commands in the ADS software which reference a dynamic object by screen number and the name of the object Thus dynamic object names only need be unique from other objects on the same screen Type in the name DATE_DISPLAY and press the Enter key The Data Source field is selected next A data source is what links a dynamic object to a location or locations in the PLC Its name must be unique from all other data sources in a system but may be referenced by multiple dynamic objects Type in PLC_DATE and press the Enter key Since data source PLC_DATE has not yet been defined a data entry form for it is automatically opened up on the screen DDii HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 Z1 Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE 999 Deg C CG Create Dynamic Object Name DATE_DISPLAY Data Source PLC_DATE Additional Calc Create a data source Nane Source Data Type WORD Source Location Scan Rate x x or HH MM SS CCO Additional Calc GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 93 A reserved source location named DATE is referenced in order to retrieve the PLC date It requires a data type of LONGWORD Regardless of the setting for the system scan rate you will probably want to check on the PLC date once a second The data source data entry form is filled out as follows DDii s
4. CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL FOLDER UTILTY TET 2 SE ASRS SS CM ME CCS O SERIES 90 PCM PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE Configure the PCM Develop Execute a MegaBasic Program Terminal Emulation Operating Status of PCM Control Functions Folder Functions Utility Save Load Clear Etc Exit PCM Software FACTORY INSERT RACK J SLOT PLC ID 30g C ADS_PCNDENO PCM This screen is the PCOP software main menu Type in lt demo system gt where lt demo system gt is one of the system names listed in Table 5 3 and then press the Enter key Note that if ADS_PC is not listed as the current drawer you will need to specify the folderas ADS_PC lt demo system gt 5 16 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Now press the F9 key to enter the Utility Menu The following screen will be displayed CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL FOLDER UTILTY LST 2 SA CLC 7S OR OC OTC PROGRAM UTILITY FUNCTIONS Save File s From PCM to Current Folder Load File s To PCM from Current Folder Directory of Files Currently Resident on PCM and in Current Folder Delete File s from PCM or Current Folder Delete All Files from PCM Cimplicity tm 90 Alphanumeric Display System Graphics Display System ONL INE FACTORY C ADS_PC DEMO PCM INSERT PCM ID RACK 9 SLOT PLC ID DS Press the F9 key to go to the
5. COMMNT READ WRITE STNDRD ES 2 SS SS CS O Type name of file to which the configuration data is to be written WRITE CONFIGURATION TO A FILE Filename SS gees Se ee sey lt lt Press Enter Key to Begin Write Operation gt gt NOTE A filename extension of CDF will be added if one is not provided File Read PC C PCOPNADS PCMSADS CDF DAGE FACTORY C ADS_PC TEST PCM ODIF IED RACK 9 SLOT PLC ID gop INSERT PCM ID Press the Enter key to cause the working space to be written to the specified configuration file Since the file already exists you will be prompted Y N to confirm that the file is to be overwritten To confirm the write operation press the key sequence Y Enter This will complete the write operation STASK COMMNT READ WRITE STNDRD 1 2 3 4 5 6 oO File already exists Overwrite Y N WRITE CONFIGURATION TO A FILE Filename OS ge0esO SB ee sey lt lt Press Enter Key to Begin Write Operation gt gt NOTE A filename extension of CDF will be added if one is not provided File Read PC PCOPNADS PCMNADS CDF ONL INE FACTORY C ADS_PCNTEST PCM ODIF IED RACK J SLOT A PLC ID INSERT PCM ID CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 D When the configuration is properly established and written to the ADS configuration file press the Esc key then Shift F9 key sequence to access the Utility function
6. Nads_pcNDEMO PCMNTCOIT CFG alarm pages Nads_pcNCORR PCMNCORR CFG reports Nads_pcNTEST PCMNOITGR CFG alarm sources Nads_pcNTEST PCMNTEST CFG data sources Nads_pcNOTTCH PCMNOITCH CFG display formats Nads_pcNEPRS PCM COIT CFG translation entrie ads_pc EPRS PCMNEZ51B CFG eng units convers lt more gt lookup table entri command scripts 100 If the list of all the systems will not fit in the window the word lt more gt will appear at the bottom of the display window Use the page up and page down keys to view the next and previous pages Select New Folder GFK 0499 When the Select new folder option is selected a data entry window is opened containing one field in which you can enter a folder name ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder Nads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date SELECT NEW FOLDER Select new folder ads_pcNtutor pcm alarm pages reports alarm sources Load new database data sources Directory of systems display fornats translation entries Rebuild database eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts Chapter 10 The ADS Cross ReferenceUtility 10 15 Any existing valid folder name may be selected If an invalid folder name is entered a message will appear at the bottom of the screen ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor
7. The decimal values hexadecimal values characters and descriptions for the standard ASCII characters are listed in the following table Characters marked with an asterisk are not processed Decimal OP ONT DAD oF A ISo NMP RI oO vininirninininininjel elele ejeje SINP AGP RISIN SI Slelolslalal Pjolr alo Hex Character o ee Description NUL null or tape feed SOH start of header STX start of text ETX end of text EOT end of transmission ENQ enquiry ACK acknowledge BEL external bell output BS backspace HT horizontal tab LE line feed VT vertical tab FE form feed CR carriagereturn SO shift out SL shift in DLE data link escape DC1 device control 1 XON DC2 device control 2 DC3 device control 3 XOFF DC4 device control 4 NAK negativeacknowledge SYN synchronous idle ETB end of transmission block CAN cancel escape sequence EM end of medium SUB substitute left square bracket ESC esc backslash FS file separator B 1 Decimal 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 Hex DP E F Em 21 22 23 24s EME 26 amp z7 8 EEE ENE N TIOL TH m gt Vv afe of od TISISIS HE D E N w E Character Ctrl Ctrl ae Description rightsquare bracket GS g
8. lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 62 A 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 TERMF GFK 0499 e Aslongas PCOP BAT is in the computer s DOS PATH this is set up as part of the PCOP installation PCOP can be directly accessed by typing ADS Enter at the DOS prompt Note If PCOP is accessed in any other way the function keys will not operate as expected Also there may be a loss of characters when the terminal display is written to TERMF is a terminal emulation software package which can be invoked from PCOP It can be used to make the PC emulate a VT100 terminal with the additional capability to do file transfers Not all VT100 escape sequences are supported those which are not supported are either displayed on the screen or ignored For more detailed information on running TERME refer to GFK 0487 which is the Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Reference Manual Features of the TERMF terminal emulation software package include The small size of TERME as compared with other terminal emulation packages e PC to PCM file transfer protocol Invoking TERMF The TERMF terminal emulation software is invoked directly fro
9. venam 125 rightor open squiggly brace 125 ie 127 delete or rubout 128 80 F1 begin function keys T 2 E Fi E a im I E a ma 07 E Fsi E I 137 89 F10 138 F11 139 F12 140 F13 141 8D F14 142 F15 143 F16 end function keys 144 9 Ctrl 0 begin control keys 145 Ctrl 1 146 Ctrl 2 147 Ctrl 3 148 Ctrl 4 149 Ctrl 5 151 Ctrl 7 152 OS Ctrl 8 153 ca Ctrl 9 end control keys 170 Ti i IBM special key codes 172 not used CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 Decimal Hex Character w jsa oo w s o 255 FF Description IBM special key codes Cursor down IBM special key code page down Cursorleft not used Cursorright Home Up IBM special key code page up not used IBM special key codes not used no keystroke Appendix B ASCII Codes B 5 Appendix Serial Port Pin Assignments and Cabling C Diagrams This appendix has two parts The first part describes the serial ports for the Series 90 70 and the Series 90 30 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor modules The second part provides wiring information for cables for use with your CIMPLICITY 90 ADS system Serial Port Pin Assignments on the Series 90 70 ADC Module The serial ports are accessed through port connectors on the ADC module and are used to communicate with external devices such as computers and disp
10. Display Value field needing to be changed to indicate Y Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 29 Creating Dynamic Objects Which Can Be Edited The next step is to define a dynamic object for displaying temperature in degrees Celsius Position the cursor on the 9 located at lt row column gt position lt 10 1 gt the sequence of three 9 s defines a numeric field three digits in width Press the Alt F7 key to begin defining a dynamic object and move to the rightmost 9 Press the F7 key to complete the selection of the dynamic object Give the object the name DEG_C_VALUE and have it reference the data source TEMPERATURE DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style EEE Deg C lt O 100 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 Vieu Alarm Page Create Dynamic Object Name DEG_C_VALUE Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc Create a data source Nane Source Data Type WORD Source Location Scan Rate C or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc 6 30 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 In our example the temperature will be stored in degrees Celsius it will be treated as an unsigned word ranging between 0 and 100 Source location Z1 will be referenced The Z memory is not true P
11. In a similar manner we choose to use function key F2 129 for Edit degrees C F4 131 for Open Valve F5 132 for Close Valve F7 134 for View Alarm Page F8 135 for CloseAlarm Page F9 136 for Ack All Alarms and F14 141 for Options Menu Enter the appropriate decimal key code values into the related touch point areas as shown below DD MM YY H MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 122R 28128 E Is XXXXX tatus yl VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style Ft att 131EN rE 999 Deg C CB 100 UIEW CLOSE ACK OPTIONS 12900 295 Ee 1239 AEE af 141U ALARMS PAGE PAGE GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 111 Pressing the Enter key when positioned on the last touch point area or the Alt F10 key from any touch point area completes the definition of the touch point areas for the current screen ON SYSTEM ON SYSTEM DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F C32 212 Edit degrees F VALVE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C CO 100 UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE ALARMS Touch screen definitions updated 6 112 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Creating a Numeric Keypad In order to edit new temperature values on our main screen we need access to a numeric keypad Sinc
12. Nematron monochrome or color OptiTOUCH e Lucas Deeco ST 2200 A listing of the system you will be building may be found at the end of this section beginning on page 6 148 Accessing the Builder Type OI_MENU at the MS DOS prompt to execute the Operator Interface products menu program resulting in the initial screen shown below EXIT DER Digital Event Recorder ADS CIMPLICITY lt tm gt 98 ADS EXIT Return to LM90 Main Menu lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press F10 to close menu window Press CHome for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 82 GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 77 Press the cursor key followed by the Enter key to select the ADS pull down menu alternatively you may just press the A key OHE EXIT PCOP ADS DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITY lt tm gt 98 ADS TERMSET CREATHLP EXIT Return to LM90 Main Menu XREF TERMF lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press F10 to close menu window Press CHome for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 82 Press the Enter key to pop up the Build
13. 9 While holding down the Alt key on your computer s keyboard simultaneously press the E key You should see your system begin executing on the target terminal 10 When you have finished viewing the system on the target terminal exit it by either pressing a function key to which the EXIT command is attached or by holding down the Ctrl key on the target terminal s keyboard while simultaneously pressing the E key Alternatively you may hard reset the ADC module Within a few seconds you should see gt displayed on your computer screen 11 To return to the Builder hold down the Alt key on your computer s keyboard and simultaneously press the Z key You should see the Builder s main menu screen Repeat steps 6 through 11 above until you complete your development Note When a system is loaded from the PC drive and executed on the ADC module it will require MORE memory than when the system is loaded from the ADCs RAM drive Thus you can be assured that your system will still fit in memory when you have completed your system and want to place it on the RAM drive The easiest way to load a system from the computer to the ADC module is via the Builder s Refresh system in RAM option under Load Save Operations Alternatively you may use PCOPs Folder Load capability although you will need to be concerned with non system files being located in the folder this is something you don t have to wor
14. ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal MPC lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate 1 800 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 88 s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Modify System Params System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI Terminal Device Printer Device NULL Default Scan rate 1 68 Default Alarm Scan rate 1 88 Startup screen Oooo0oooo0o0odaq Once the Modify System Parameters data entry form has been closed press the Esc key to return to the Builder main menu Note that the changes you made to the form are now reflected in the status information on the screen ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate 1 Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate a Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN BG s 58 s Configuration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Load Save operations Print system summary Options PID Terminal Exit GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 81 Creating the Main Screen Now that you have selected the correct target terminal for your configuration you may proceed to create
15. LPT1 COM1 LPT2 COM2 File The port that the printer is connected to should be specified If any of the ports other than FILE is selected then the File Name field on the screen will not be accessible If FILE is selected then the File Name field will be accessible File Name A default file name of lt system gt lis will appear in this field however any valid MS DOS filename may be entered in this field A drive specification or directory specification is not allowed in this field The file will be put in the database subdirectory of the current folder Systems Listing Options Note The System listing options is not implemented in this release of CIMPLICITY 90 ADS 10 10 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 PID Listing Option When the PID listing option is selected a data entry window is opened containing one field as shown in the following screen ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date PID LISTING OPTION Print Destination Listing Format Do you want the PID Loop Information included in the listing H Y N screens 42 alarm pages reports alarm sources data sources display formats translation entries eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts Printer setup Designate print destination System listing options Xref listing op ns Write print optio
16. March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 2 Print Options When the Print options option is selected the following screen is displayed Another menu window is opened on the screen giving additional options of Printer setup Designate print destination System listing options PID listing option Xref listing options Write print options to file Print Destination Listing Format screens alarm pages reports alarm sources data sources display formats translation entries eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date LPT1 80 colum 60 lines Stdtext 42 GFK 0499 Chapter 10 The ADS Cross Reference Utility System Listing inline xref expanded info PID Listing Cross Reference Listing Printer setup Designate print destination System listing options PID listing option Xref listing options Write print options to file 10 7 Printer Setup 10 8 When the Printer setup function is selected a data entry window is opened containing eight fields which can be set by the user Paper Width Lines Page Form Feed LF with CR Nulls after CR Listing format Leading and Trailing ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date Printer Setup Paper Width JJ 807132 LF with CR Y Y N Lines Page
17. oP EN V Create Translation Create EUC 999 Deg C CG Copy Dynamic Name DEG _F_UALUE Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Y CY N Hex Notation Left Justify zero Fill Available for Edit GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 99 Since no additional calculations exist at all much less one we could use we ll need to create one In this case we want to create a new translation entry Selecting the Create Translation entry opens up a data entry form for a new translation entry The entry will be given the name DEGC_TO_DEGE the A term will be 1 8 the B term 0 and the C term 32 Specify Data Types will be left as N DD MMM YY HH MM SS REE Deg F C32 21D Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style t o Create a translation entry Name DEGC_TO_DEGF 999 Deg C C The variables used to perform the translation are described by the following function Output Value lt A x CInput Value D gt C A 1 800000 B G 32 Specify Data Types Y N JJ Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL Completing the translation entry data entry form returns you to the dynamic object data entry form with the newly created translation entry referenced as the additional calculation The rest of the form is correct except that the minimum a
18. our valve by setting it to 0 The PLCSETB command is used to set a single bit to either a 0 or a 1 The first parameter in the command is the memory location to be set the second parameter indicates that memory location Z2 0 is to be set to 0 Function key five is the same as that for function key four above except that the value 1 is being stored Although no text on screen 1 specifies a button to be used for exiting the system we will want to provide one at least while we re developing our system Ina real production system we would probably want to remove this capability before giving operators access to the machine on the factory floor The EXIT command even though the command doesn t require any parameters the empty parentheses are still required accomplishes the system exit and is assigned to function key fourteen Press the Alt F10 key to complete the key assignments form Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 119 Specifying the Starting Screen In looking at the status area at the top of the screen we see that we still haven t specified a startup screen the screen which will initially be displayed whenever the ADC module is soft reset To specify it we must again access the Modify System Parameters data entry form Use the Esc key to return to the main menu select Configuration Operations and then select Modify System Parameters The star
19. 9 Press the F7 key to complete the selection of the dynamic object Give the object the name DEG_C_VALUE and have it reference the data source TEMPERATURE Create Dynamic Object Name DEG_C_UALUE Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc 999 Deg F C32 Display Format Display Value Y N UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS Create a data source Source Data Type WORD Source Location Scan Rate x x or HH MM SS CC gt Additional Calc 6 96 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 In our example the temperature will be stored in degrees Celsius it will be treated as an unsigned word which ranges between 0 and 100 Source location Z1 will be referenced The Z memory is not true PLC memory as it is located on the ADC module This makes the Z memory ideal for producing a tutorial as you will not need to be concerned with inadvertently changing data in your PLC Ina typical application you would reference such a value from a true PLC memory location for example R100 or Al6 TUTOR Create Dynamic Object Name DEG_C_UALUE Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc 999 Deg F C32 Display Format Edit degree Display Value CYAN SEE Deg C CO 100 UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS Create a data source TEMPERATURE Source Data Type WORD Source Location a1 Scan Rate x x or HH
20. DEGC_TO_DEGF Display Format Display Value Y CY N Hex Notation Min 32 Left Justify Max 212 zero Fill Available for Edit Immediate write Translation entry added to system 6 34 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Creating a Bar Chart Next we will want to create a bar chart which will represent mercury rising in our thermometer Position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 4 30 gt press the Alt F7 key to begin defining a dynamic object move the cursor first to lt 4 32 gt and then to lt 14 32 gt This time you press the Alt F2 key to complete the dynamic object a menu selection form is opened asking you what type of predefined object you want to create AN DS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM Bar Chart ee BN DS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM Trend Chart DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C CO 188 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu Col Text Dynamic defining GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 35 6 36 In this case we want a bar chart so the Bar Chart menu entry is selected A data entry form for the bar chart is opened up on the screen This form is very similar to that of a normal dynamic object T
21. Data Source PLC_DATE Additional Calc Create a data source Nane Source Data Type WORD Source Location Scan Rate x x or HH MM SS CC gt Additional Calc A reserved source location named DATE is referenced in order to retrieve the PLC date It requires a data type of LONGWORD Regardless of the setting for the system scan rate you will probably want to check on the PLC date once a second The data source data entry form is filled out as follows Wiley HH MM SS 999 Deg F C32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C c 100 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page Create Dynamic Object Name DATE_DISPLAY Data Source PLC_DATE Additional Calc Create a data source Name PLC_DATE Source Data Type LONGWORD Source Location DATE Scan Rate 06 00 01 00 x or HH MM SS CC gt Additional Calc CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 6 Pressing the Enter key completes the entry and closes the data source data entry form returning you to the dynamic object data entry form The dynamic object data entry form is completed as follows Wises HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C C 1800 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2
22. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Power up Status DISPLAY MAIN MENU Note The display on the screen may be slightly different than the one shown above as determined by the firmware revision of your OIT However all of the information is the same and should be set as shown For the COLOR entry substitute MONOCHROME for COLOR if you have a monochrome terminal The date and time display may be enabled if you so desire If you are using an OIT with version 1 6 or earlier firmware the parity setting must be set to ZERO rather than to NONE The OIT Port 1 setting is set to match the default setting of Port 2 on the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module so that they can communicate The Configuration Menu specifies the serial communications parameters ports and other parameters for the OIT Use the cursor to move through the items on the screen Use the spacebar to toggle through the available option settings for an item before saving the settings you select this is described further below For example if the cursor does not already cover the first field on the screen displaying the ANSI setting as shown above on the screen use the cursor control keys to move the cursor up down right or left to that field When you are on the selected field press the spacebar to display the available settings which in this case are ANSI VT100 and VT52 Verify that all of the settings are correct as shown above If any of them are different change the
23. FOLDER UTILTY 1 2itri 3 ata S Gedel jclear 8 kads OF This Function Will Take Several Minutes Continue CY ND CIMPLICITY CM S36 ADS ADS Environment AAAA omy DEVELOPMENT or EXECUTE ONLY System Name GRO Terminal Table WEY Printer Table Listing of Files in ADS Folder CPC PCOPNADS PCM ADS_MENU ENU ADSDEU DAT ADSSETUP 301 ADSDM ENU PCMEXEC BAT ADSEXE DAT OIT TBL ADSB EXE ADSDM EXE ADSE EXE ADSPRNT EXE ADS_MENU ADS_RUN MENU EXE SPOOL EXE STARTUP EXE ADSBM HLP README 201 ADS CDF ADSFLT EXE ADSPID EXE MIBM TEL MINI TBL TCOIT TBL TMOIT TBL Total Bytes Available 57708544 Folder Size 983324 Bytes lt lt Press Enter Key to Begin ADS Installation gt gt lt EXECUTE ONLY fields default to RAM EMPTY OIT TBL ASCII TBL respectively gt lt lt Press PgUp or PgDn Key to Scroll Listing of Files gt gt ONLINE FACTORY D ADS_PC TUTOR PCM INSERT PCM ID RACK SLOT amp PLC ID Gi 6 6 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 After pressing the Y key to continue the ADS software installation process will commence If you previously executed a demonstration system as outlined in Chapter 5 this process will complete very quickly otherwise several minutes will be required to complete the installation While PCOP is loading files to the ADC module the port 1 LED on the module should be blinking and the message Loading File to PCM shou
24. HH MM SS VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE 999 Deg F 32 21D Edit degrees F 999 Deg C CB Edit degree Name Data Source Additional Calc Create a data source Name Source Data Type Source Location Create Dynamic Object DATE_DISPLAY PLC_DATE PLC_DATE LONGUWORD DATE Scan Rate 06 66 61 88 Cx or HH MM SS CO Additional Calc Pressing the Enter key completes the entry and closes the data source data entry form returning you to the dynamic object data entry form The dynamic object data entry form is completed as follows HH MM SS DD MMN Y VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg F C32 212 Edit degrees F OPEN VALVE Create Dynamic Object Name DATE_DISPLAY Data Source PLC_DATE Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Hex Notation Left Justify zero Fill Available for Edit Data source added to system 999 Deg C CB Edit degree Press the Enter key to complete the entry and close the dynamic object data entry form 6 94 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 The HH MM SS is converted to a dynamic object which will display the PLCs time in the same manner as you just did for the date Position the cursor on one end of the field designator press the Alt F7 key to begin defining a
25. However in this case data source Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 129 PLC_FAULTS will only be used as a string so the scaling may be done directly in the data source if desired After completing the data source data entry form you are returned to the dynamic object data entry form Select the Display Format field press the Alt S key to open up the object list window and select Create Format The resulting data entry form should be filled out as shown below OPTIONS MENU Eol the PLC Fault Table Fo the I O Fault Table Create a display format Name STATUS_STRNG Data Type STRING Range Action TABLE HAS FAULTCS gt REVERSE TABLE HAS NEW FAULT REVERSE BLINK NO FAULTS IN TABLE NORMAL Note that the input range is specified as the converted strings NOT the original BYTE values The display format s data type MUST always match the current data type if an additional calculation has been applied NOT the original input data type of the data source The second action REVERSE BLINK indicates that both video attributes are to be applied After completing the display format data entry form you are again returned to the dynamic object data entry form It should be completed as shown below OPTIONS MENU the PLC Fault Table the I O Fault Table KXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Return to the main screen Create Dynamic Object Name PLC_FLT_STAT Data S
26. In either case exit the PCOP software 4 Execute the PC based Builder specifying the appropriate system name and if needed the folder location 5 Ifyou are creating a new system you should specify the appropriate target terminal name before creating any screens By default the target terminal name will be either CPC MPC EIBM or VIBM This must be changed in the Modify System Parameters data entry form under Configuration Operations to the terminal table used for your particular target terminal 6 Create the screens alarms etc that you want to see executed on the target terminal Remember to go back to the Modify System Parameters data entry form and specify the starting screen number if you have not already done so 7 Save your system additions and changes to your computer s hard disk by using the Save system to disk option under Load Save Operations 8 Execute the Terminal option on the Builder s main menu Press the Enter key on your computer s keyboard a couple of times If you do not see one or more gt characters appear on your computer s screen the ADC module is either not hard reset or it is not connected to your computer If a system is running on the target terminal exit it see step 10 below otherwise hard reset the ADC module with its reset button by depressing it for at least five seconds Within a few seconds you should see gt displayed on your computer screen
27. OPEN VALVE touch area to open the valve this also resets our alarm condition As a consequence all our acknowledged alarms are automatically removed from the alarm page VALUE ALARM EXAMPLES 6 142 7 Apr 88 19 61 15 VALVE IS 0PEN Cstatus a mee VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator a mee OPEN comm UIEN ALARM PAGE CLOSE ALARM PAGE ACK ALL ALARMS OPTIONS MENU CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 To remove the alarm page from the display press the CLOSE ALARM PAGE touch area 7 Apr 88 18 61 58 32 Deg F C32 212 Edit degrees F VALUE IS 0PEN Cstatus style VALVE IS xCLOSED x Cannunciator style Deg C CO 100 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 143 6 144 Accessing the Options Screen and the PLC Fault Table Now let s look at our new options screen by pressing the OPTIONS MENU touch area Note that in this example the PLC fault table is described as having new faults and the I O fault table is described as having no faults at all Depending on the status of your PLC you may or may not have any new faults in the I O fault table however your PLC fault table should have one or more faults in it relating to the resetting of the ADC module during this tutorial 7 Apr 88 18 62 36 OPTI
28. Press CHome for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 82 6 14 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Fill out the System name field with the text TUTOR SYSTEM jy PATH lt lt Press Home for HELP gt gt lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press F10 to close menu window Press CHome for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 82 Press the Enter key twice to access the Builder s copyright screen alternatively you can press the Alt F10 key Pressing the Enter key while viewing the copyright screen will display the Builder s main menu screen ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal MPC CCOM2 gt Default Scan Rate Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Configuration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Load Save operations Print system summary Options PID Terminal Exit 8 a 8 8 a 8 8 a 8 8 The Builder s main screen provides current system infor
29. Printer Dir Screens MAIN C Dx Key assignments updated Specifying the Starting Screen TUTOR Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination BG s 58 s 1 B STDPRN New screen Modify screen Screen paint Delete screen Copy screen Key assignments List screens Print screen details In looking at the status area at the top of the screen we see that we still haven t specified a startup screen the screen which will initially be displayed whenever the ADC module is soft reset To specify it we must again access the Modify System Parameters data entry form Use the Esc key to return to the main menu select Configuration Operations and then select Modify System Parameters The startup screen should be set to 1 as shown below ADS BUILDER Current System Name COIT cCON2 gt CNULL gt ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Terminal Printer Dir Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts TUTOR Default Scan Rate 1 Default Alarm Scan Rate B Startup Screen ADS Print Destination BG s 58 s STDPRN I Modify System Params System Name Terminal Terminal Device Printer Device Default Scan rate Default Alarm Scan rate Startup screen TUTOR COIT comz NULL Pressing the
30. Yellow rection UP Blue imum Value Magenta imum Value 100 0000 Cyan Foreground WHITE Background BLACK Display format added to system 6 38 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 oo Using a Lookup Table Having completed what we want to do in order to monitor temperature we next need to set up our monitoring of our valve which may be in either of two states open 0 or closed 1 For one status indicator we want to see either OPEN or CLOSED displayed on the screen Position the cursor on the X at lt row column gt position lt 6 51 gt and press the Alt F7 key to begin defining a dynamic object Move the cursor right to position it on the rightmost X column 58 and then press the F7 key to complete the selection of the dynamic object Give the dynamic object a name of VALVE_STATUS DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS KXXXXXXXI Cstatus style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C CO 180 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page Create Dynamic Object UALUE_STATUS Data Source Additional Calc Display Format Display Value GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 39 6 40 Now enter a data source name of VALVE and press the Enter key Since the data source does not currently exist a data entry
31. edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page Create Dynamic Object Name DATE_DISPLAY Data Source PLC_DATE Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Hex Notation Left Justify zero Fill Available for Edit Data source added to system Pressing the Enter key completes the entry and closes the dynamic object data entry form The HH MM SS is converted to a dynamic object which will display the PLCs time in the same manner as you just did for the date Position the cursor on one end of the field designator press the Alt F7 key to begin defining a dynamic object then move to the opposite end of the field and press the F7 key to complete the selection The object is given the name TIME_DISPLAY and is tied to a data source to be named PLC_TIME Data source PLC_TIME is defined very similarly to data source PLC_DATE DD MMM YY DESE 999 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C CO 1800 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 Vieu Alarm Page Create Dynamic Object Name TIME_DISPLAY Data Source PLC_TIME Additional Calc Create a data source Name PLC_TIME Source Data Type LONGWORD Source Location TIME Scan Rate 46 08 01 0A c or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc The remainder of the dynamic object data entry form is filled out the same as for the DATE_DISPLAY dynamic object with only the
32. pcm Database Status Up To Date SELECT NEW FOLDER Select new folder ads _pCNXxxxx pcm alarm pages reports alarm sources Load new database data sources Directory of systems display formats translation entries Rebuild database eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts Invalid folder name entered try again If a valid existing folder name is entered it will become the new folder The path field on the main screen will be updated with the path of the new folder Note The system field is set to None Selected since a system has not yet been selected You must now use the Load new database option to load the desired ADS system into working memory 10 16 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Rebuild Database The Rebuild database option is used to force the current database to be rebuilt If this function is selected and the database is already up to date a message indicating the database is up to date will be displayed and the request will be denied ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder Nads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date Print Destination LPT1 System Listing Listing Format 80 colum inline xref 60 lines expanded info Stdtext PID Listing Cross Reference Listing screens alarm pages reports alarm sources Load new database data sources Directory of systems display f
33. programming and configuration software packages PLC FAULT TABLE TOP FAULT DISPLAYED 6816 TABLE LAST CLEARED 1 2 15 17 86 TOTAL FAULTS 06244 ENTRIES OQUERFLOWED 66228 PLC DATE TIME 82 29 20 51 28 FAULT FAULT TIME LOCATION DESCRIPTION Reset of addition of or extra option module Reset of addition of or extra option module Reset of addition of or extra option module Reset of addition of or extra option module Reset of addition of or extra option module Reset of addition of or extra option module Failed Battery Signal Failed Battery Signal Reset of addition of or extra option module Reset of addition of or extra option module Reset of addition of or extra option module Reset of addition of or extra option module Reset of addition of or extra option module CLEAR PRINT EREFRSH B170 EFULL DOUN KUP WPC DOUNSPG UP MAXIT 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 2 8 2 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 6 70 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Pressing the F10 key returns you to the options screen Note that the description for the PLC fault table has changed from Table has new fault to Table has fault s this change is due to you viewing the PLC fault table OPTIONS MENU Uieu the PLC Fault Table MJANE UAE Uien the 170 Fault Table NO FAULTS IN TABLE Return to the main screen Exit the system and hard reset the ADC module LH F14 O
34. reports alarm sources data sources display formats translation entries eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts Interactive search Print options File operations Exit When the listing is completes the following screen will appear ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date Print Destinati Listing Format Listing is Complete lt press any key to continue gt Press lt Alt P gt to Pause printing Press lt Alt A gt to Abort printing screens alarm pages reports alarm sources data sources display formats translation entries Interactive search Print options File operations Start printout Exit eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts GFK 0499 Chapter 10 The ADS Cross Reference Utility 10 19 Section 5 Exit 10 20 To exit the Adsxref utility select the Exit option If changes were made to any of the Print Options that have not been saved the following screen will be displayed ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date Print Destinat Listing Format Changes have been made to the Print Opitons which have not been saved Continue Exiting J screens alarm pages reports alarm sources data sources display formats translation entries eng units
35. x refer to a combination of the control key and a letter Ctrl key held down while simultaneously pressing the appropriate key Keysmarked as KPx refer to the appropriate numeric key on the numeric keypad normally found on the righthand side of the keyboard F11 F12 and F13 are not available for use with the PC based Builder If your target terminal is a GE Fanuc monochrome or color OIT a GE Fanuc Mini OIT non touch version a VT100 compatible or a monochrome or color IBM PC compatible you should proceed to Section 3 If your target terminal is a GE Fanuc Mini OIT Touch a Nematron monochrome or color OptiTouch or a Lucas Deeco ST 2200 you should proceed to Section 4 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Section 3 Development Tutorial for Non Touch Terminals This section is a step by step tutorial for building and executing a system which will use a target terminal with an attached or built in keyboard You should use this section if you target terminal is one of the following GE Fanuc monochrome or color OIT e GE Fanuc Mini OIT e VT100 compatible Monochrome or color IBM PC compatible A listing of the system you will be building may be found at the end of this section beginning on page 6 73 Accessing the Builder Type OI_MENU at the MS DOS prompt to execute the Operator Interface products menu program resulting in the initial screen shown below EXI
36. 0 90 70 59 RDIA 22 XX 9 SDA o0 f Abe primary o __RD B 10 21 SD B 0 PORTI o TERMRX 9 m 10 RTS A a0 2 eae 0 TERMRX 25 11 CTS A 0 PORT 0 4 L 12 TERM CTS 0 AUXILIARY 7 So 8 aa Bie aed PORT2 50 5 7 23 CTS B o aoc 0 20 o Porta o GND 7 7 GND 9 CY o 1 SHLD gt 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE GENDER INDICATED IS FOR PRIMARY PORT GENDER IS REVERSED FOR SECONDARY PORT Figure C 8 ADC Connection to an OIT RS 485 Note The examples of cable connections shown above are for a Series 90 70 ADC module installation They can also be used with the Series 90 30 ADC module when connected to the WYE cable described previously C 6 CIMPLICITY 901 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Appendix Changing Default Port Settings D The serial port settings may be reset after the initial installation if you want to do so To do this hard reset the ADC and follow the procedures in this appendix You may also need to refer to the Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module User s Manual GFK 0255 for more details If at all possible you should delay making any port setting changes to Port 1 while you are still developing your Operator Interface System as communicating files to the ADC module will be more difficult Your computer can be used as
37. A 2 Index TERMSET 8 Touch mini OIT Touch terminals development tutorial lucas deeco st 2200 mini OIT 6 77 optiLQUCH color or monochrome Troubleshooting the ADC module Series 90 30 3 7 Troubleshooting the ADC module Series 90 70 Tutorial touch terminals Tutorial non touch terminals Typical ADS system configuration 1 2 U User defined function keys per screen 1 3 Utility cross reference 10 1 Utility cross reference accessing Utility help V el 1 system converting to version 2 E 1 VT100 2 2 B 2 installation of W Workmaster Workmaster II b 2 Write print options to file 10 12 WYE cable for Series 90 30 ADC B 5 Xref listing options 10 11 Index 5
38. C lt a 18 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu Row Col Select the Reverse option the reverse video attribute will be applied to the entire selected region 6 26 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 6 Creating Dynamic Objects PLC Date and Time Now its time to begin animating objects on the screen First we ll animate the display of the PLC s date and time The date and time fields are specified by the data format strings DD MMM YY and HH MM SS respectively First position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 4 61 gt Press the Alt F7 key to begin defining a dynamic object one which will display data or status when the system is executed The status area will confirm that you are defining a dynamic object Move the cursor to lt 4 69 gt the date field will now be entirely in reverse video DDue HH MM SS 999 Deg F C32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C lt O 100 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page F8 Close Alarm Page F9 Acknowledge Alarms F14 Options Menu Dynamic def ining Press the F7 key to complete the selection of the region which is to become a dynamic object A dynamic object data entry form is aut
39. Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 68 s Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Configuration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Load Save operations Print system summary Options PID Terminal Exit Before creating the first screen in a new system you should always go into the Configuration operations sub menu and open the Modify System Parameters data entry form Doing so will result in a display such as the one shown below ADS BUILDER Current System Name NEW Terminal MPC CCONZ2 gt Printer CNULL gt Dir ADS_PC NEW PCM Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Default Scan Rate 1 68 s Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 68 s Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN I Modify System Params System Name Terminal MPC Terminal Device COM2 Printer Device NULL Default Scan rate 1 08 Command scripts Default Alarm Scan rate 1 00 Startup screen You should select the Terminal field and type in the name of the terminal you intend to connect to the ADC module Once the proper terminal is selected the Builder will be able to enable all the various attributes of your terminal e g color touch capability supported character sets screen size lines and columns etc as you create new screens Refer to GFK 0641 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Di
40. Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 2 If you have changed the ADC port 1 communications settings to accommodate a slow printer device you will also need to change the configuration information used by PCOP and TERMF if your computer will need to communicate with the ADC module while the ADS software is running but not when the ADC module is hard reset The two situations where this may occur is if 1 the software running on the ADC module needs to access the PC drive or 2 you need to use your computer temporarily in place of your printer By default your computer s serial port communications settings are set up to match those of the ADCs port 1 factory settings These are e 19200 baud 1 stop bit 8 data bits no parity hardware handshaking If you need to change any of these settings you should not make them to the standard computer communications setup file Instead they should be changed ONLY in the USER communications file If you want to make any changes to the user computer communications configuration file execute the ADS menu option TERMSET specifying USER DSM EXIT BUILD PCOP ADS DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 DS TERMSET EXIT Return to LM90 Main Menu STANDARD USER lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt
41. Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 SHIELD PORT 1 RS 232 TD PORT 1 RS 232 RD PORT 1 RS 232 RTS PORT 1 RS 232 CTS NO CONNECTION SIGNAL GROUND PORT 1 RS 232 DCD 4 PORT 2 RS 485 SD A PORT 2 RS 485 RTS A PORT 2 RS 485 CTS A PORT 2 TERMINATION CTS 4 2 a44357 RS 232 TD PORT 2 RS 232 CTS PORT 2 RS 232RD PORT 2 RS 232 DTR PORT 2 RS 232 DCD PORT 2 RS 232 RTS PORT 2 RS 232DTR PORT1 RS 485 SD B PORT 2 RS 485 RTS B PORT 2 RS 485 CTS B PORT 2 TERMINATION RD PORT 2 GOOOOOOOHOO RS 485 RD B PORT 2 PORT 2 RS 485 RD A PPP 2900 OO OE PORT 1 PORT 2 444358 SHIELD TO SHIELD TO RS 232 TD 2 RS 232 TD 2 RS 232 RD 3 RS 232 RD G RS 232 RTS 4 RS 232 RTS 4 O RS 232 CTS H 5 RS 232 CTS Oo SIGNAL GROUND 1 amp SIGNAL GROUND TO a RS 232 DCD 8 iia le RS 232 DCD 8 gpa H RS 485 SD B Oa Aseo T y g RS 485 RTS B RS 485 RTS A 0 a H RS 485 CTS B RS 485 CTS A 11 H TERMINATION RD TERMINATION CTS AD Ree RS 485 RD B
42. Each of the cables physically appear the same the only difference is the internal pin connections An IC690CBL701 cable provides the required signal connections between an ADC and a Workmaster industrial computer WORKMASTER 944507 ADC IC690CBL701 h ae RS 232 m ee joo PORT 1 Figure C 3 ADC to Workmaster Computer i 4PL PIN TD RD RTS CTS DCD DTR GND ononuar WP 7 D 9 PIN WORKMASTER CONNECTOR ii a44528 PIN 3 RD 2 TD 5 CTS 20 DTR 8 DCD 1 SHLD 7 GND ADC 25 PIN CONNECTOR An IC690CBL702 cable provides the required signal connections between an ADC and an IBM PC AT personal computer PC AT a44529 ADC IC690CBL702 PL RS_232 i 3 PORT 1 o i 4PL So PIN DCD RD TD DTR RTS CTS GND aan kr ON PIN a44530 SHLD TD RD DCD CTS DTR GND S Nonu N AT 9 P N CONNECTOR Figure C 4 ADC to PC AT Personal Computer Appendix C Appendix Title Gea mae ADC 25 PIN CONNECTOR An IC690CBL705 cable provides the required signal connections between an ADC and a Workmaster II computer or an IBM Personal System 2 personal computer It is also capable of connecting the ADC to a GE Fanuc OIT a G
43. Enter key to execute it At any point in time the Esc key may be used to cancel an operation or to close a menu After exiting an option that you have executed you will be returned to the Operator Interface Products Menu with the ADS menu highlighted but not pulled down 5 6 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 3 Configuring PCOP to ADC Communications GFK 0499 Depending on your computer you may or may not need to change PCOPs default terminal emulation configuration file before executing PCOP By default the following configuration settings will be in effect for your computer 1 COM1 of your computer is communications port to ADC port 1 2 video adapter is CGA with snow setting works for all but MDA adapters 3 will communicate to a Series 90 70 ADC module 4 19200 baud 1 stop bit 8 data bits no parity hardware handshaking Of the four items above only the first three may be changed when your computer is to be used to install the ADS software onto the ADC module Possible reasons for changing the first three are given below along with directions for how to change them Typically you will want to use your computer s COM1 port as the communications port However if your computer supports a second serial port COM2 it may be used instead if desired Most computers available today have either a CGA with or without snow EGA or VGA video adapter card insta
44. F9 Acknowledge Alarms F14 Options Menu 20 Kegefinitions AK1 DYN_EDIT 1 DEG_F_VALUE REVERSE AK9 ACK_ALARM PLCSETW Z1 0 AK2 DYN_EDIT 1 DEG_C_VALUE REVERSE AK10 AK3 AK11 AK4 PLCSETB Z2 0 0 AK12 AK5 PLCSETB Z2 0 1 AK13 AK14 PSHSCN 100 AK6 AK15 EXIT AK7 PSHALM 1 AK8 POPALM 1 ScreerNumber 100 OPTIONS Start Row 5 End Row 14 Start Column 6 End Column 75 Image NORMAL Background BLACK Foreground WHITE Dynamic Object IO_FLT_STAT Dynamic Object PLC_FLT_STAT Start Row 5 End Row 5 Start Row 4 End Row 4 Start Column 34 End Column 52 Start Column 34 End Column 52 IO_FAULTS Data Source PLC_FAULTS Data Source Additional Calc Additional Calc STATUS_STRNG Display Format STATUS_STRNG Display Format Display Value Yes Left_justify Display Value Yes Left_justify Avail for Edit No Avail for Edit No GFK 0499 6 74 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 bears SES e Peeks Pasa ek Ste ere peti tert weet RES He ee eg Phe ees EE EEA T E E 5 5 5 OPTIONS MENU F1 View the PLC Fault Table XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX F2 View the I O Fault Table XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX F14 Return to the main screen F15 Exit the system and hard reset the ADC module ee 10 Keydefinitions AK1 PLC_FAULT AK9 AK2 IO_FAULT AK10 AK3 z AK11 AK4 AK12 AK5 AK1
45. HOST COMPUTER SELECTIONS Monochrome Generic ASCII Printer Normal IBM Character Set TARGET TERMINAL SELECTIONS CON2 Terminals Supported COIT MOIT TMINI CIBM TARGET PRINTER SELECTIONS Printers Supported ASCII TTY Changes have been made do you wish to save them il Now press the Enter key to save the changes you have made and exit the setup utility You are now ready to proceed with the demonstration systems described in the following section and the development tutorial see Chapter 6 GFK 0499 Chapter 5 Installing the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software 5 13 Section 5 Executing a Demonstration System on the ADC Module A set of demonstration systems is provided with the ADS software and were copied to your computer s hard disk during the ADS software installation process Demonstration systems are provided for each of the terminal types supported by ADS that will show you features of the ADS and provide you with useful techniques pertinent to your equipment These systems do not write to any memory in your PLC and require no special program in the PLC to animate them If you do not want to view the demonstration systems at this time skip the following procedures and go directly to Chapter 6 which is the Development Tutorial Use These Steps to Download the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software Connect the serial port of your computer to PORT 1 of the ADC module Series 90 70 PLC Users PORT 1 on the ADC module is the top por
46. Included TMOIT TEL Not Included UT1 TBL Not Included LUDCO TBL Not Included In this dialog box you will have the option of defining your target terminal as either COM1 or COM2 and whether or not to include the MIBM MINI TCOIT TMOIT VT100and orLUDCO terminal tables 7 10 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 8 Specifying the Target Printer The target printer selection tells ADS what type of printers are to be supported that are attached to the ADC module NOT attached to your computer In the bottom third of the ADS Setup Utility page 2 screen you can view the current target printer selections The ASCII and TTY printer tables are always included since they are resident in the firmware on the ADC module and will work with any printer you attach to the ADC module The only difference between the ASCII and the TTY printer tables is that use of the ASCII table will automatically activate form feed generation every 63 lines while the TTY table will never generate any form feeds The PCNEC NEC printer LA100 DEC LA100 printer and EPSON Epson compatible printer e g Epson FX 100 printer tables may also be included at a small cost of available memory on the ADC module If you do not need one of these additional tables you should not include them Note that only the EPSON printer table supports the printing of OIT terminal graphic characters all other selections wil
47. Latched example Text Range Text Range Text Log 71 Command sc ON Action Action Action Action lt or HH MM SS CC gt LATCHED_CNDS N Timestamp Y Latched v Notify N Auto ack N ript added to system Output text to Following alarm pages A latched alarm differs from an unlatched one in that only a single entry may appear in the alarm page at any one time Once a latched alarm is logged in an alarm page the entry must be acknowledged by the operator before any new instances of it are logged CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Updating the Main Screen s Key Assignments Now that we have finished creating our options screen and our alarm handling we need to modify the main screen s key assignments accordingly Use the Esc key to return to the Builder s main menu and then choose Screen Operations Choose the Key Assignments menu option and select the MAIN screen screen 1 Add key assignments for function keys 7 8 and 9 and change the key assignment for function key 14 as shown below ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Screen key assignments for MAIN lt 1 PSHSCNC98 gt DYN_EDITC1 DEG_F_ VALUE REVERSE POPSCNC 900 PSHSCNC98 gt DYN_EDITC1 DEG_C_VALUE REVERSE POPSCN 94 PLCSETBCZ2 G1 0 gt PLCSETBCZ2 1 gt PSHALMC1 POPALNC1 gt ACK_ALARMG PLCSETWCZ1 gt PSHSCNC188 gt
48. MINI OIT or Mini Touch OIT If the terminal you have selected is a GE Fanuc Mini OIT or Mini Touch OIT use the following steps Note that the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software refers to the Mini OIT terminal as MINI and the Mini Touch OIT as TMINI Note The following steps should be used as a quick reference and for CIMPLICITY 90 ADS use only These steps should not be performed without first reviewing Chapters 1 2 and 3 of your Mini Operator Interface Terminal User s Manual GFK 0361 Make sure that the MINI OIT power is turned off Connect an IBM XT compatible keyboard requires a keyboard with a DIN connector to the applicable connector on the back of your MINI OIT Note Many IBM AT compatible keyboards have a switch that allows it to perform as an XT style keyboard One such keyboard is the GE Fanuc Cimstar keyboard IC642PKB250B B Revision or later only not the A Revision If you have an IC600KD516 Mini Touch OIT version B or later or if the firmware has been upgraded to version 2 5 31 or later a keyboard will not be needed for configuration All configuration can be done via the touch screen interface Turn on the MINI OIT Press the Ctrl 1 keys press and hold Ctrl then press 1 on the attached keyboard The MINI OIT Configuration Menu will be displayed on the screen Fill in the Configuration Menu as follows FANUC OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINAL REL 2 3 394 27FEB91 NO ECHO SEND ANY CASE D LINE RAP NO AUTO LF
49. MM SS CO Additional Calc The dynamic object data entry form is completed to display a left justified value making it available to be edited within an allowable range of 0 to 100 Create Dynamic Object Name DEG_C_UALUE Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc 999 Deg F C32 Display Format Display Value Y N Hex Notation Min Left Justify Max 160 zero Fill Available for Edit Immediate write skk Deg C CA 1800 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK Edit degrees C B ALARM ALARM ALL PAGE PAGE ALARMS Data source added to system GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 97 6 98 Copying a Dynamic Object After completing the dynamic object which will display the temperature in degrees Celsius we next want to define a very similar dynamic object which will display the temperature in degrees Fahrenheit First we will make a copy of the just defined dynamic object DEG_C_VAIUE by pressing the F9 key while the cursor is positioned somewhere on the dynamic object DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 Z129 Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE 999 Deg C CO 100 UIEN CLOSE ACK Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL PAGE J ALARNS Dynamic OBJECT copied to intermediate buffer Now move the cursor up to the 9 located at lt row column gt position lt 5 3 gt and press the Alt F9 k
50. Now press the CLOSE VALVE touch area to close the valve Note that all three of our alarms are logged in alarm page 1 along with the time and date of their occurrence The entries corresponding to both the latched and unlatched alarms are shown blinking the entry corresponding to the auto acknowledged entry is displayed steady Also note that our thermometer now shows a temperature of 100C and that the message Look at bar chart is displayed at the bottom of your terminal s display These two items are a result of the action associated with the logging of the latched alarm 7 Apr 88 19 60 68 VALUE ALARM EXAMPLES 19 08 62 7 Apr 88 Unlatched example VALVE IS CLOSED Cstatus style 19 00 02 7 Apr 88 Latched example Cannunciator style 19 00 62 7 Apr 88 Auto ack example UIEW CLOSE ACK OPTIONS ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS Look at bar chart 6 140 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Now press the OPEN VALVE touch area to open the valve Note that the entry corresponding to the auto acknowledge alarm has been removed from the alarm page This is because when an acknowledged alarm transitions out of its alarm state it is automatically removed from all alarm pages to which it is logged 7 Apr 88 19 00 25 UALVE ALARM EXAMPLES 19 08 62 7 Apr 88 Unlatched example VALVE IS 0PEN Cstatus style 19 00 02 7 Apr 88 Latched example VALVE IS xCLOSE
51. Operator Interface System 6 31 6 32 Copying a Dynamic Object After completing the dynamic object which will display the temperature in degrees Celsius we next want to define a very similar dynamic object which will display the temperature in degrees Fahrenheit First we will make a copy of the just defined dynamic object DEG_C_VAIUE by pressing the F9 key while the cursor is positioned somewhere on the dynamic object DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C CO 1800 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu Dynamic OBJECT copied to intermediate buffer Now move the cursor up to the 9 located at lt row column gt position lt 6 1 gt and press the Alt F9 key A copy of dynamic object DEG_C_VAIUE is placed on the screen with its data entry form automatically opened up All data on the form is identical to that for DEG_C_VALUE except that the name field is blank remember that dynamic object names must be unique on a given screen DD MMM YY HH MM SS GEE Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C CO 1800 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 Vieu Alarm Page Copy Dynamic Object Name
52. Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu 6 68 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 To remove the alarm page from the display press the F8 key 29 Feb 88 20 49 44 32 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS x0PENx Cstatus style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style gt Deg C 10 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page F8 Close Alarm Page F9 Acknowledge Alarms F14 Options Menu GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 69 Accessing the Options Screen and the PLC Fault Table Now let s look at our new options screen by pressing the F14 key Note that in this example the PLC fault table is described as having new faults and the I O fault table is described as having no faults at all Depending on the status of your PLC you may or may not have any new faults in the I O fault table however your PLC fault table should have one or more faults in it relating to the resetting of the ADC module during this tutorial OPTIONS MENU Uieu the PLC Fault Table QRS ya Uien the 170 Fault Table NO FAULTS IN TABLE Return to the main screen Exit the system and hard reset the ADC module Lt Options Menu Press the F1 key to gain access to the display of the PLC fault table Note that this display is the same as the one which can be accessed from within the Logicmaster 90
53. RSOR SCREE NO CURSOR FIVE ERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION 19 2 NONE 8 BIT 1 STOP SOFT PT TO PT RALLEL PORT MODE PARALLEL IS AUX SERIAL IS PRIMARY FIGURATION SAVE DIAGNOSTIC SAVE SCREENS 00 SCREENS 00 RIGHI SELECT F5 GFK 0499 Chapter 4 Setting Up and Connecting the Display Terminal 4 5 The MINI OIT Serial Port setting is set to match the default setting of Port 2 on the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module The Configuration Menu specifies the serial communications parameters ports and other parameters for the OIT Use the cursor to move through the items on the screen Use the spacebar to toggle through the available option settings for an item before saving the settings you select this is described further below For example if the cursor does not already cover the first field on the screen displaying the ANSI setting as shown above on the screen use the cursor control keys to move the cursor up down right or left to that field When you are on the selected field press the spacebar to display the available settings which in this case are ANSI VT100 and VT52 Verify that all of the settings are correct as shown above If any of them are different change them to match the settings shown After verifying the settings cursor to the SAVE field and press the ENTER key The SAVE field will be shown in reverse video while the settings are saved Note The display on the screen may be slightly
54. Sree cena aie eat pees he OER ale eden WH Stat he We A was Serial Port Pin Assignments for the Series 90 70 ADC 0 cece eee Serial Port Pin Assignments for the Series 90 30 ADC 0 eee eee eee ADC to Workmaster Computer 2 0 00 6666s ADC to PC AT Personal Computer 0 0 0 6 6c cee ADC to Workmaster II Computer or PS 2 Computer 0 6 6 6 eee eee eee WYE Cable Connections for the Series 90 30 ADC 1 1 cece eee ee ADC Port 2 Connection to an OIT RS 232 2 ete ene n eee ADC Connection to an OIT RS 485 2 saanane neunana een ene n ene GFK 0499D CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 xiii 1 2 2 3 2 6 3 3 3 5 C 1 C 2 C 3 C 3 C 4 C 5 C 6 Table 2 1 Table 3 1 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 7 1 Contents Comparison of Hard and Soft Reset 0 6 6 6 nee eee eee Comparison of Hard and Soft Reset 0 eee eens Specifying Demonstration Systems to View 666s Target Terminal Port Selection 0 0 eens System Name and Terminal Table Selections 00 ccc eee eee Serial Port Default Settings sec c wee aa ede We Shed eae ade WE Se ER Re ed wee E Key Functions for System Building 0 eee Key Functions for System Execution 0c Target Terminal Port Selection 2 0 eens GFK 0499D CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 xiv Chapter 1 In
55. Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Configuration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Load Save operations Print system summary Options PID Terminal Exit 8 a 8 8 a 8 8 a 8 8 The Builder s main screen provides current system information across the top of the screen On the left hand side of the screen are items that you will create along with the current quantities listed for each of these items On the right hand side of the screen is a window containing a menu listing a group of operations which are accessible from the main menu screen You will interact with a number of these menu items throughout this tutorial GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 79 System Configuration Press the Enter key to access the Configuration Operations submenu ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal MPC lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Modify system parameters PLC data sources Display formats Translation table Engineering unit conversion Lookup table Command scripts eooaoooo
56. XT ATPS 2 or compatible computer is used primarily to initially load the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software onto the ADC module It can also be used when running TERMF to function as a remote disk drive PC for the archival storage and retrieval of systems or as a printer print file stored on disk Information on TERMF can be found in Appendix B in this manual and in the Series 90 PCM User s Manual GFK 0255 The printer must supply a serial connection in order to be used with the ADC module Line drawing characters etc will be converted to printable characters before being sent to the printer One of several different terminals may be connected to the ADC module These include the GE Fanuc 12 inch OIT color or monochrome Mini OIT Mini Touch OIT any VT100 equivalent terminal a Workmaster I or IBM PC XT a Workmaster II or IBM PC ATPS 2 or compatible color or monochrome computer running TERME Nematron 12 color touch terminals IWS 1511T and IWS 1513T and 12 monochrome touch terminals IWS 1011T and IWS 1013T Some of the terminals listed above may be better than others for certain applications see Appendix A for details PS 2s a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Product Organization The ADS software is organized into two major components e PC Based Builder e ADCBased Executor Both components are
57. a monitor screen and a tuning screen Optionally you may include a loop setup screen typically only needed for initially setting up the loop definitions The PID module may be accessed from within your ADS operator interface system See Chapter 15 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference manual GFK 0641 for more details on the operation of the PID Module Specifying the Host Computer The host computer selections indicate whether your computer has a color display or a monochrome display whether or not the computer should emulate the GE Fanuc OIT terminal character set when running the PC based Builder and what type of printer if any is attached to the computer The current selections may be viewed in the upper third of the ADS Setup Utility page 2 screen To change the host computer selections execute the Host Computer Selections menu option The following screen will be displayed on your computer s display l CIMPLICITY Ctm gt 90 ADS Setup Utility l Version 4 61 HOST COMPUTER SELECTIONS Monochrome Generic ASCII Printer Normal IBM Character Set TARGET TERMINAL SELECTIONS comz Terminals Supported COIT MOIT TMINI CIBM TAR Host Computer Selections Host Computer Monitor MONOCHROME COLOR Host Computer Character Set Normal Host Printer Type Generic ASCII Printer PAGE 2 OF Z In this dialog box you will have the opportunity to configure the information concerning your host computer The host computer selecti
58. again hard reset the ADC and try to access the ADC using PCOP You should enter PCOP and verify that the ONLINE indication is displayed at the bottom of the screen Do not short the battery itself The battery may burst or burn or release hazardous materials 9 If the flag at the bottom of the PCOP screen still does not display ONLINE the board may be defective You should return it for repair 10 Check the PLC fault table in the Logicmaster 90 software If there is a bad or missing module fault the board may be defective otherwise contact the GE Fanuc hotline for assistance GFK 0499 Chapter 2 Getting Started Series 90 70 PLC Users 2 7 Section 2 Configuring the ADC Module in Logicmaster 90 70 Software The second step in the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS installation procedure is to add the ADC module s you have installed in the PLC racks to the Series 90 70 I O configuration file using Logicmaster 90 configuration software Note The following steps are for installing the ADC module only These steps should not be performed unless you are familiar with Logicmaster 90 configuration software which is described in GFK 0263 Logicmaster 90 Programming Software User s Manual Start up your Logicmaster 90 software on your computer and enter the Logicmaster 90 70 Configuration package Choose F1 to enter I O Configuration A setup screen representing the modules in a rack will be displayed The following example screen represen
59. and lt title gt is an ASCII text string SPAGE The help information related to a particular help index may be broken over multiple pages by specifying the page break SPAGE Chaining to another group of help screens identified by another unique index is made possible via the chain specifier SCHAIN lt index gt where again lt index gt is a value between 1 and 999 SCHAIN 768 768 Chaining to Additional Help Chaining to another help index allows you to access common help information from multiple unique starting points without the need to replicate the information for each instance of use Car must be taken however to avoid chaining help indices together into an infinite loop 9 1 The following five screens show how this help information might look on your terminal display The screen below is a standard display screen Function keys F1 and F2 are used to access help information Press F1 for basic information on how to use the online facility including the use of multiple pages and chaining Press F2 for information only on how to use chaining within the online help facility Press the F2 key to view the help specific to chaining After viewing the help information pressing the Enter key will remove the help window from the screen Chaining to Additional Help Chaining to another help index allows you to access common help information from multiple unique starting points without t
60. at bottom of page to OI MENU added reference to pulling down the ADS menu and selecting TERMSET and added screen example e Page 5 9 Section 2 changed to Section 4 Under STEP 1 changed ADSSETUP to OI_MENU and added screen examples e Page 5 12 added entry for Lucas Deeco ST 2200 to table and deleted footnote at bottom of table iti Preface Page 5 14 changed Section 3 to Section 5 Page 5 15 Change first sentence and added a new screen example Page 5 16 under STEP 6 deleted second paragraph changed screen example and added text to last paragraph beginning with Type in Page 5 18 added entry for Lucas Deeco to table Page 5 20 in NOTE changed directorynamefrom ADS_PC DEMO PCM to ADS_PC lt demasystem gt PCM Page 6 1 changed text of first paragraph Page 6 2 under STEP 3 changed ADS to OI MENU and added following paragraph Page 6 3 under STEP 6 in the first paragraph added PCM to folder name and changed paragraph two to read Type in TUTOR Page 6 4 beginning with STEP 9 rest of chapter has been completely changed from the previous version Page 7 1 added second paragraph and screen example at top of page Page 7 3 second paragraph changes F10 to Esc Deleted typically after environment is from last sentence in first paragraph Page 7 4 added paragraph at top of page Page 7 5 in first paragraph deleted rest of seco
61. attribute press the Alt F1 key note that the Re designator disappears from the status area Altematively you can press the F1 key to select the video attributes menu and then select the choice of Reverse again This will also cause the reverse video choice to be toggled off The difference between the two approaches is that the Alt F1 key will remove ALL selected video attributes GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 85 Editing Screen Text Whenever you edit text onto screens that will be displayed on a touch terminal you will nearly always want to display the touch point grid to help you align your text in relation to the touch points you will be creating Pressing the Delete key toggles on the display of the touch point grid TUTOR 1 Row Col Text Static The rows of s indicate the lower righthand corner of each touch point that the terminal supports except the bottommost line of touch points where the dashed line covers up the 4 s In this example four rows with ten touch points in each row are supported If you type a character directly on top of one of the s that character will not be visible since the s are always displayed on top Pressing the Delete key to toggle off the display of the touch point grid will show you the characters which appear beneath each character Using the cursor keys to po
62. begin the selection of the region and move the cursor to postition lt 6 18 gt Press the F1 key to bring up the video attribute menu Reverse Blink DD MM YY H MM SS Underscore s VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style t t t OPEN VALVE 999 Deg C CA 100 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL PAGE PAGE ALARMS TUTOR 1 Rou Col Text Static Select the Reverse option the reverse video attribute will be applied to the entire selected region Use the same techniques as in the previous step to reverse video the text Edit degrees C VIEW ALARM PAGE CLOSE ALARM PAGE ACK ALL ALARMS and OPTIONS MENU Again note that all these areas are to be touch areas and are thus laid out appropriately with regards to the touch point grid DD MM YY H MM SS 999 Deg F 32 Z1 Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style ee OPEN VALVE 999 Deg C CA 1800 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL PAGE TUTOR 1 Row Col Text Static GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 91 Creating Dynamic Objects PLC Date and Time Now its time to begin animating objects on the screen Since we ve already set up our touch point areas we won t be needing the touch point grid for awhile press the Delete
63. dynamic object then move to the opposite end of the field and press the F7 key to complete the selection The object is given the name TIME_DISPLAY and is tied to a data source to be named PLC_TIME Data source PLC_TIME is defined similarly to data source PLC_DATE TUTOR AN ADS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM TUTOR AN ADS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM 198 DD MMM Y DEES 999 Deg F 32 212 Edit degrees F VALVE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE 999 Deg C CG Create Dynamic Object Edit degree Name TIME DISPLAY Data Source PLC_TIME Additional Calc Create a data source Name PLC_TIME Source Data Type LONGWORD Source Location TIME Scan Rate 06 00 01 00 x or HH MM SS CC gt Additional Calc The remainder of the dynamic object data entry form is filled out the same as for the DATE_DISPLAY dynamic object with only the Display Value field needing to be changed to indicate Y GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 95 Creating Dynamic Objects Which Can Be Edited The next step is to define a dynamic object for displaying temperature in degrees Celsius Position the cursor on the 9 located at lt row column gt position lt 13 3 gt the sequence of three 9 s defines a numeric field three digits in width Press the Alt F7 key to begin defining a dynamic object and move to the rightmost
64. entry which displays an additional set of menu options Execute the New Alarm Source option and fill out the alarm source s data entry form per the following ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name UNLATCHED Source Data Type STATE PLC Location Z2 6 Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC gt Additional Calc Range ON Action Text Unlatched example Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp Y Latched N Notify N Auto ack N Output text to Following alarm pages Tm i 4 i 3 Analarm source defines a PLC location which is to be monitored at a user specified rate regardless of the screen or screens currently displayed In this example we are looking at a STATE single bit value located at location Z2 0 Whenever the value is found to be ON set to 1 the text string Unlatched example is to be displayed on alarm page 1 With the Timestamp field set to Y the entry in the alarm page will show the PLC time and date when the alarm condition was seen by the ADC module By leaving the Latched field set to N each time the location is found to transition from OFF to ON a new entry will be logged in the alarm page Because of this it is possible that multiple occurrences of the same alarm may appear in the alarm page Such an alarm is said to be unlatched GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 135 6 13
65. finished creating In order to use it as our template we must make a copy of it Select the Copy an alarm source menu option and specify UNLATCHED as the alarm source to be copied ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal COIT lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate B8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Alarm Sources ADS Print Destination STDPRN UNLATCHED New alarm source Modify an alarm source Delete an alarm source View current sources List sources Print sources Enter the name of the Alarm source to copy MESIN Pressing the Enter enter key opens up an alarm source data entry form with all fields filled out identically to those of alarm source UNLATCHED ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name Source Data Type STATE PLC Location Z2 6 Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC gt Additional Calc Range ON Action Text Unlatched example Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp Y Latched N Notify N Auto ack N Output text to Following alarm pages 71 6 62 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 We will name this new alarm source AUTO_ACK For the purposes of this tutorial we will leave the PLC location specified the same as for the UNLATCHED alarm Typically you will always need to change the PLC Location field following an ala
66. form is opened up for its definition It should be filled in as shown below Note the source location is specified as Z2 0 This specifies that a single bit of data should be extracted from bit bO the lowest order bit in the word stored at Z2 DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXAXRN Cstatus style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C CO 1800 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 Vieu Alarm Page Create Dynamic Object UALUE_STATUS Data Source VALVE Additional Calc Create a data source Name UALUE Source Data Type STATE Source Location aah Scan Rate x C or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc After completing the definition of data source VALVE you will be returned to the dynamic object s data entry form Note that a STATE data source always returns either the text string OFF for a 0 state or ON for a 1 state However we want to see either OPEN or CLOSED instead This will require us to use a lookup table entry to make the conversion Select the Additional Calculation field press the Alt S key for the Object List window and then select Create Lookup A data entry form for a lookup table entry is opened on the screen Fill it out as shown below DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 varve IS XXXXXXXXI Cstatus style Fi edit degrees F Create a lookup table entry Name OPEN_CLOSED Data Type STATE 999 Deg C CA
67. formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts TUTOR Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN I Modify System Params System Name Terminal Terminal Device Printer Device Default Scan rate Default Alarm Scan rate Startup screen TUTOR MPC comz NULL 1 68 1 66 6 16 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 The Enter key is used to move from field to field within the data entry form when on the last field of the form pressing the Enter key will close the data entry form saving its contents Use the Esc key to cancel the entry of data into the form The Ctrl X key is used to clear the contents of a field You should fill in the Terminal and Terminal Device fields of the form using information from Table 5 2 It is suggested that you also change the Default Alarm Scan rate field to 0 5 Note that some fields such as the Terminal Device field present you with a menu of choices to pick from The T and J cursor keys are used to highlight the desired choice pressing the Enter key selects it ADS BUILDER Current System Name MPC CCOM2 gt CNULL gt ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Terminal Printer Dir Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entrie
68. gt 90 DS EXIT Return to LM90 Main Menu lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 82 Pressing the Enter key pulls down the currently selected menu which in this case is the ADS products menu The topmost menu option is initially highlighted Note that a menu may be selected and pulled down in one operation by pressing the key corresponding to the first letter of the menu name for example pressing the letter A in our example for the ADS products menu EXIT DER Digital Event Recorder ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 DS EXIT Return to LM90 Main Menu lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 82 11 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Once a menu has been pulled down the T and J cursor keys may be used to select a menu option For example pressing the J cursor key twice would select the ADSSETUP menu option CEE EXIT BUILD PCOP ADS DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP A
69. hardware malfunction i e the diagnostic checks detect a failure the ADC fails or the PLC is not present Corrective action is required in order to get the ADC functioning again On When the LED is steady on the ADC is functioning properly Normally this LED should always be on indicating that the diagnostic tests were successfully completed and the configuration data for the module is good Flashing The LED flashes during power up diagnostics Note The ADC has a watchdog timer that is periodically reset by the ADC software If the watchdog timer expires the ADC will cease functioning and the MODULE OK BD OK LED will turn off Serial Port Activity LEDs PORT 1 and PORT 2 The other two LED indicators PORT 1 PORT 1 ACTIVE and PORT 2 PORT 2 ACTIVE blink to indicate activity on the two serial ports PORT 1 blinks when port 1 either sends or receives data PORT 2 blinks when port 2 either sends or receives data Restart Reset Pushbutton The Restart Reset pushbutton on the front of the ADC board is a multifunction pushbutton which can be pressed to use a different function of the ADC If the Restart Reset pushbutton is depressed for less than 5 seconds when the MODULE OK BD OK LED is on the ADC will restart the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software if it has been installed on the module This reset is referred to as a soft reset A power cycle will also cause the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software to restart if it has been inst
70. has not passed diagnostics Use the following procedure to determine the cause of the problem 1 Make sure that power to the rack is on the PLC is okay and that the ADC is seated properly 2 Power off and then back on or hard reset the ADC Try to access the ADC using PCOP refer to page 5 10 for more information You should enter PCOP and verify that the ONLINE indication is displayed at the bottom of the screen If PCOP goes ONLINE then the problem is simply a burned out LED 3 Power off and remove the battery short out the circuit board connector leads with a screwdriver This will delete everything from the battery backed RAM All user programs and files will be deleted Because memory can be maintained through the backplane connection on the Series 90 30 ADC you may need to physically remove the module from the baseplate Then reconnect the battery power up again hard reset the ADC and try to access the ADC using PCOP You should enter PCOP and verify that the ONLINE indication is displayed at the bottom of the screen 4 Do not short the battery itself The battery may burst or burn or release hazardous materials 5 If the flag at the bottom of the PCOP screen still does not display ONLINE the board may be defective You should return it for repair 6 Check the PLC fault table in the Logicmaster 90 software If there is a bad or missing module fault the board may be defective otherwise contact the GE Fanuc hotl
71. host computer the target terminal specify the target terminal port as the port to which your terminal is actually connected typically COM2 for all but the CIBM and MIBM terminal tables and the target printer if a printer is being used 3 Use PCOP accessed either via the OI Menu program or by typing ADS at the MS DOS prompt to install the ADS software in execute only mode specifying the name you intend to use for your system the target terminal table and optionally the target printer table When the software installation is complete the ADS Executor will automatically attempt to find and execute the system If it does not exist on the module s RAM drive nor in the currently selected folder PC drive which will be the case if this is a new system the error message Error opening system configuration file PC lt system name gt CFG will be displayed on the target terminal screen and the ADC module will hard reset itself If the system is found you should exit the system this will also hard reset the ADC module In either case exit the PCOP software 4 Execute the PC based Builder specifying the appropriate system name and if needed the folder location 5 Ifyou are creating a new system you should specify the appropriate target terminal name before creating any screens By default the target terminal name will be either CPC MPC EIBM or VIBM This must be changed in the Modify System Parameters data entry form un
72. item should be set to Y yes if the printer recognizes a form feed Set this item to N if the printer does not recognize the form feed character Doing this will cause the system to insert a sequence of carriage returns to advance to the top of the next page CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 LF with CR Y N The line feed character advances the paper to the next line for printing This item determines whether the system automatically inserts a line feed lt CR gt lt LF gt each time the printer head returns to the left page margin Note Some printers can be set up to automatically advance to the next line by entering only lt CR gt Refer to the user s documentation for your printer to determine how your printer works Set this item to N if you do not want the system to insert a line feed character after each carriage return character Set this item to Y to have the system insert the lt LF gt character after each lt CR gt character Nulls after CR 0 10 This entry is usually set to 0 If a number from 1 to 10 is entered the system will insert that number of null characters after each carriage return character Some printers require these null characters to give the print head time to return to the left margin after the carriage return Printer Setup Control Sequences If the printer uses leading or trailing control characters enter the characters here If you move
73. key assignments field itself The PSHSCN 100 command assigned to function key 14 is used to display the OPTIONS screen 100 on the target terminal display GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 65 Interacting With an Alarm Page Now that we have completed our system we need to save it both to disk and to the ADC module then execute it as we originally did back in steps 18 through 20 Use the Esc key to return to the Builder s main menu and select Load Save Operations Then consecutively execute menu items Save system to disk Refresh system in RAM and Execute system in RAM Once the startup screen is displayed press the F7 key to view alarm page 1 TUTOR AN ADS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM 168 29 Feb 88 20 43 35 32 Deg VALUE ALARM EXAMPLES IS xOPEN Cstatus style Fi edi IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style Deg F4 Open valve FS Close valve F2 edi View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu Now press the F5 key to close the valve Note that all three of our alarms are logged in alarm page 1 along with the time and date of their occurrence The entries corresponding to both the latched and unlatched alarms are shown blinking the entry corresponding to the auto acknowledged entry is displayed steady Also note that our thermometer now shows a temperature of 100C and that the message Look at bar chart is displayed at the botto
74. key to toggle it off of the display First we ll animate the display of the PLCs date and time The date and time fields are specified by the data format strings DD MMM YY and HH MM SS respectively First position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 4 61 gt Press the Alt F7 key to begin defining a dynamic object one which will display data or status when the system is executed The status area will confirm that you are defining a dynamic object Move the cursor to lt 4 69 gt the date field will now be entirely in reverse video DDue HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 Z129 Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE 999 Deg C CA 100 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL PAGE J ALARNS TUTOR 1 Rou Col amp Text Dynamic def ining 6 92 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Press the F7 key to complete the selection of the region which is to become a dynamic object A dynamic object data entry form is automatically opened so that you can tell the ADS software some things about the object DDii s HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 Z129 Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE 999 Deg C CG Create Dynamic Object Edit degree Name Data Source Additional Calc Display Format Display Value
75. list is REVERSE This item indicates the video attribute which should be applied to the field while the edit is active Function key two is another field edit command this time for dynamic object DEG_C_VALUE on screen 1 Function key four is used to open our valve by setting it to 0 The PLCSETB command is used to set a single bit to either a 0 or a 1 The first parameter in the command is the memory location to be set the second parameter indicates that memory location Z2 0 is to be set to 0 Function key five is the same as that for function key four above except that the value 1 is being stored Though no text on screen 1 specifies a key to be used for exiting the system we will want to provide one at least while we re developing our system Ina real production system we would probably want to remove this capability before giving operators access to the machine on the factory floor The EXIT command even though the command doesn t require any parameters the empty parentheses are still required accomplishes the system exit and is assigned to function key fifteen 6 46 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Pressing the Enter key completes the function key definitions and returns you to the screen operations menu ADS BUILDER Current System Name COIT cCON2 gt CNULL gt ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Terminal
76. lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 082 or type the command ADS_SET USER at the MS DOS prompt and follow the directions given below on how to use TERMSET By default the standard and user computer communications files are exactly the same Thus if you need to modify the user file and you have already made changes to the standard file e g to use your computer s COM2 port you need to make the identical changes in the user file The following example will show how to use TERMSET to modify the computer s standard communications file to 1 use your computer s COM2 port to communicate with the ADC module 2 specify that your computer has a VGA video adapter and 3 specify that you expect to be communicating with a Series 90 30 ADC module The exact same process is followed when modifying the computer s user communications file Appendix D Changing Default Port Settings D 7 Access the ADS menu option TERMSET as described above The following screen should be displayed on your computer s screen TERMSET vu 2 27 Please select the desired function BASIC SETUP display change comm port settings display change video adapter settings CUSTOM CONFIGURATIONS display change keyboard settings display change attribute settings display change normal keybindings display change application mode keybind ings display chang
77. main menu Note If you found the demonstration system helpful and would like to see how certain operations were implemented each demonstration system that was installed can be found in the ADS_PC lt demo system gt PCM directory of your computer s hard disk You can use the ADS Builder to view and print out portions or all of the system which are of interest 5 20 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Chapter Development Tutorial Creating Your First 6 Operator Interface System A good way to learn a new system is to walk through a tutorial The following pages provide you with a step by step tutorial to creating and executing an ADS system Section 1 contains a sequence of steps which are common to all the supported target terminals Section 2 presents an overview of how the ADS software will be used describes some key concepts and terminology and outlines the application which will be implemented in the tutorial Section 3 will be followed by those of you who are using a terminal that does NOT have a touch screen interface Section 4 will be followed by those of you who are using a terminal with a touch screen interface Note If you just completed executing one of the demonstration systems in the previous chapter you may skip directly to Step 5 in Section 1 The folder select screen in Step 5 is accessed from the PCOP main menu by pressing F8 to access the FOLDER menu and then F1
78. manual for details on using the Operator Interface Products Menu CEE EXIT BUILD PCOP ADS DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 DS TERMSET EXIT Return to LM98 Main Menu lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 62 Upon executing the CREATHLP menu item you will be prompted for the name of the system and the path where it will be found By default this data entry form will be filled out with the system and path that you last used with one of the ADS menu items DSM EXIT BUILD PCOP ADS DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 DS TERMSET ICREATHLP EXIT Return to LM90 Main Menu SYSTEM PATH lt lt Press Home for HELP gt gt lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 062 GFK 0499 Chapter 9 The ADS Help Utility 9 5 To access this utility from the MS DOS prompt type the following command CREATHLP lt system gt lt path gt where lt system gt is the name
79. must access the PCOP software by typing ADS USER at the MS DOS prompt Failure to do so will result in a communications failure between the ADC module and the attached computer Appendix D Changing Default Port Settings D 13 Note As noted above ADS is typed in at the MS DOS prompt to access the PCOP software when the ADC module is hard reset If you perform an ADS installation the ADS software will automatically begin executing If you have changed the default settings for port 1 you must first exit PCOP and then access it again by typing ADS USER at the MS DOS prompt before performing the first load or archive of an ADS system The USER parameter may also be used in conjunction with the IBM_TERM BAT file for directly accessing the TERMF utility D 14 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Appendix GFK 0499 Converting a Version 1 System to Version 2 The file formats for the files making up an ADS operator interface system changed from Version 1 to Version 2 of the ADS product Therefore to use a system created with Version 1 01 1 02 1 03 or 1 04 of the ADS software with ADS Version 2 01 or later software you must first pass it through the ADS Version 2 database conversion utility UPDV1V2 This conversion utility will not alter your original database files unless you indicate a destination folder which is the same as the folder containing your V1 system it is recommended t
80. of the builder is useful ONLY for tutorials and the creation of very small systems The PC based Builder should be used for all serious system creation and editing Systems created with either Builder are completely compatible between both Builders Accessing The Builder The ADS PC based Builder may be accessed either by directly calling it or alternatively it may be accessed via the OI Menu program Most users will find the OI Menu program the most convenient as it also gives easy access to other ADS software utilities The OI Menu program may be accessed either by pressing the OI key on the Logicmaster 90 main menu or by specifying OI_MENU at the MS DOS prompt In either case the initial OI Menu screen will be displayed From the initial screen the ADS menu is selected and then the Builder option is chosen SYSTEM M PATH lt lt Press Home for HELP gt gt lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press F18 to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 62 8 2 The SYSTEM name field is filled out with the name of a new or existing ADS system The name may consist of from 1 to 5 alphanumeric or underscore _ characters If no PATH to a source folder is specified the system will be created in accessed from the folde
81. of your ADS operator interface system and lt path gt is an optional path specification for where to find your help text file The path has to be specified only if neither of the following two criteria is met 1 the lt system gt HEL file is located in the current default MS DOS subdirectory or 2 the lt system gt HEL file is located in the system folder lt system gt PCM located in thedrawer ADS_PC A file lt system gt HLP will be created by the create help utility It will warn you if too many lines or columns are used for particular indices though you should also take into account the constraints of your particular terminal s display The resulting lt system gt HLP file should ultimately reside in the same system folder as the rest of the files making up your ADS operator interface system so that it can later be copied to the ADC as part of the overall system CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Chapter The ADS Cross Reference Utility 10 The Adsxref Utility is a PC based utility that can be used to create a listing of the PID loop definitions and a listing of all cross references in the system Section 1 Running the Adsxref Utility There are two methods for entering the ADS Cross Reference Utility The preferred method is to use the Operator Interface Products Menu as shown in the screen below Refer to Chapter 11 of this manual for details on using the Operator Inter
82. on your computer s screen These characters indicate that the ADC module is now hard reset ADS EXECUTOR exiting DATA MANAGER exiting gt GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 125 6 126 To return to the Builder s Load Save operations menu press the Alt Z key ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI Printer Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts lt C0M2 gt lt NULL gt Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM QOrPOrPFNDMROAOAN Default Scan Rate B8 s Default Alarm Scan Rate 58 s Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Load system Save system to disk Modify current directory Refresh system in RAM Clear system Print destination CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Creating the Options Screen Use the Esc key to return to the Builder s main menu and from there select the Screen Operations menu Execute the New Screen option and fill out the screen s data entry form as shown below Note that this new screen will not cover the full area of the screen as did the main screen screen 1 ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI lt C0M2 gt Printer CNULL gt Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM
83. or print reports to a printer when your ADS operator interface system is executed via the Executor see above See Chapter 13 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference manual GFK 0641 for more details on the operation of the Print Spooler The Fault Table Module provides you with two screens for displaying the PLC and I O fault tables maintained by the Series 90 CPU These screens are almost identical to those supported by the Logicmaster 90 Programming and Configuration software packages The fault table module can be accessed either from the Menu Program or from within your ADS operator interface system See Chapter 14 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference manual GFK 0641 for more details on the operation of the Fault Table Module The PID Module provides you with four screens including the loop setup screen for viewing and manipulating PID loop data resident in the Series 90 CPU These screens include a setup screen a configuration screen a monitor screen and a tuning screen The PID module may be accessed either from the Menu Program or from within your ADS operator interface system See Chapter 15 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference manual GFK 0641 for more details on the operation of the PID Module GFEK 0499 Chapter 7 ADS Setup Utility 7 5 Section 5 7 6 Customizing the ADS Execute Only Environment The ADS execute only environment is used in two main ways First it is used in conjunction with developing a system using the PC based
84. part of your PCOP software The CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software automatically starts TERMF when the installation process is complete At this point the ADS software will begin loading the demonstration system you have selected to the ADC module After a pause of about one minute you will begin seeing activity on your target terminal Note that the long load time of the system is due to the fact that the system is being loaded from your computer When a system is loaded from the ADCs RAM disk the load time is much shorter GFK 0499 Chapter 5 Installing the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software 5 19 When you are finished viewing the demonstration system exit the system from the main menu use the F10 function key on your terminal to go there After a short pause about 3 seconds with a Series 90 70 ADC about 20 seconds with a Series 90 30 ADC you will see a gt prompt on the TERMF screen of your computer as shown in the example screen below TERMF terminal emulator copyright 1988 1989 GE Fanuc Press ALT Z keys to return to programmer main menu The gt prompt indicates that communications has been restored between your computer and the ADC module If you want to execute the demonstration system again press the Alt E key press the Alt key and while holding it down simultaneously press the E key on your computer s keyboard If you do not want to view the demonstration system again press the Alt Z key to return to the PCOP
85. reduces them by about 23 GFK 0499 Chapter 1 Introduction to CIMPLICITY 90 ADS 1 3 Chapter Getting Started Series 90 70 PLC Users GFK 0499 2 This chapter explains how to install and set up your CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Display system on your Series 90 70 PLC system The chapter is divided into two sections The necessary equipment and software packages required for the installation process are described first After that separate sections describe the installation procedure for installing your ADC module and configuring it in Logicmaster 90 70 software Section 1 Installing the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor ADC module in a Series 90 70 PLC rack Section 2 Configuring the ADC module in Logicmaster 90 configuration software Explains how to add an ADC module to the Series 90 70 I O configuration file 2 1 What You Will Need Before you can begin the installation procedure you must have the following items 1 A Series 90 70 Programmable Logic Controller PLC 2 A computer with a hard disk This may be A Workmaster II industrial computer or IBM PersonalSystem 2 PS 2 personal computer AnIBMPC XTorAT personal computer with an 83 key or 101 key keyboard An industrial IBM AT computer with a standard 101 key keyboard A Workmaster or Cimstar I industrial computer with an 83 key or 101 key keyboard 3 A Logicmaster 90 system including software hardware and appropriate cables Refer
86. required to build or modify a system they are included in the software IC641SWP771 Only the Executor component is needed to execute a completed system The Series 90 PCOP programming software contains a screen see following chapter Installing the ADC for details which allows you to either install all three components onto the ADC module for the development environment or only the Executor component for an execute only environment Each of the components is explained in detail in the chapters which follow Product Capacity The following list gives the major maximum capacity numbers for the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software product Screens 999 40 60 typical User Defined Function Keys 15 per screen e Alarm Pages 999 10 20 typical Reports 999 10 20 typical e PLC Data Sources Limited only by available memory 250 400 typical e PLCAlarm Sources Limited only by available memory 100 200 typical The maximum available to a particular system will be limited by available memory In addition the fastest that a PLC data or alarm source may be scanned is once every 250 milliseconds Note Typical numbers are based on 1 a system resident on the ADCs RAM disk 2 the ADS software installed on the ADC in execute only mode and 3 no option modules other than the print spooler being used Use of the Fault Tables option module reduces the typical numbers by about 20 use of the PID module
87. scripts If the name of a valid existing system is entered a process similar to the process at startup will occur If a system name is entered that does not exist or is not found in the current folder a status message will be displayed in the window as shown in the following screen ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date LOAD NEW DATABASE Print Destination The database entered does not exist Listing Format or is not found in this folder lt press any key to continue gt screens alarm pages reports alarm sources data sources Directory of systems display formats Select new folder translation entries Rebuild database eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts 10 14 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Directory of Systems When the Directory of systems option is selected a window is opened which displays the directory of all the ADS systems in the current drawer The drawer is the directory in which the current folder is located ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date DIRECTORY OF SYSTEMS Print Destination ads_pc DEMO PCM QUAD CFG Listing Format Nads_pcNDEMO PCM COIT CFG Nads_pcNDEMO PCMNC IBM CFG Nads_pcNDEMO PCMNTMINI CFG Nads_pcNDEMO PCMNTMOIT CFG screens
88. software on your computer how to download the ADS software to the Series 90 30 and Series 90 70 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module and how to use the ADS Software Setup Utility to customize the ADS for your application It also tells you how to run the Demonstration Systems provided on the ADS software which allows you to view the ADS features for your terminal type Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First OIT System This is a tutorial that walks you through the steps required to create an example of an operator interface system Chapter 7 Using the ADS Setup Utility Describes how to customize the ADS software to fit the needs of your particular application Chapter 8 ADS Offline PC Based Builder Describes the differences between the PC Based Builder and the ADS Builder on the ADC module Chapter 9 ADS Help Utility Describes how to create and invoke context sensitive help screens for your ADS operator interface systems Chapter 10 ADS Cross Reference Utility Describes how to create a listing of the PID loop definitions and a listing of all cross references in the ADS operator interface system Chapter 11 Operator Interface Products Menu Describes how to access and use the Operator Interface Products Menu which provides easy menu driven access to several operator interface tools and utilities Appendix A Terminal Setup Provides setup information for the terminals which may be used with the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS S
89. the ADS Reference Manual The key assignments tables below should be used as a reference while using the Builder and Executor CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Table 6 1 Key Functions for System Building Key Function Key Sequence GOLD Insert Help Home Quit Esc or F10 Save Alt F10 Object list Alt S Refresh screen AW Clear field AX Beginning of line GOLD End of line GOLD gt Top of screen GOLD Bottom of screen GOLD J Video select F1 Video clear Alt F1 Color F4 Character set Alt F4 Double wide Alt W Double size Alt D Draw toggle Alt F5 Draw area F5 Delete line End Undelete line GOLD End Select toggle F3 Cut area F6 Paste area Alt F6 Startdynamic predefinedobject Alt F7 or GOLD KP7 End dynamic object F7 End predefined objects Alt F2 Delete dynamic object Alt F8 Modify dynamic object F8 Copy dynamic object F9 Paste dynamic object Alt F9 Touch screen grid Delete Touch screen assignments GOLD Delete t Num Lock must be set to OFF for 83 key keyboard F11 and F12 keys on enhanced ATand PS 2style keyboards cannot be used use SHIFT F1 and SHIFT F2 The MPC and CPC terminal tables are used for the PC based Builder only 1 Keys marked as Alt x refer to the appropriate alternate key Alt key held down while simultaneously pressing the appropriate key 2 Keys marked as x refer to the appropriate control key Ctrl key held down while simultaneously pres
90. the PC Based Builder Many screens have been changed to reflect Version 4 01 Additionally corrections and text changes have been made where necessary to enhance the readability of the manual Following is a list of changes to version D GFK 0499D as compared to version C GFK 0499C e Page 1 3 under Product Organization changed three components to two components and changed bulleted items to PC Based Builder and ADC Based Executor Page 3 2 under number 5 in list added Lucas Deeco ST 2200 Page 4 1 added Section 5 Lucas Deeco ST 2200 to list of display terminal sections Page 4 4 deleted second paragraph under STEP 6 Page 4 5 added paragraph beginning with If you have to STEP 1 Page 4 6 deleted second paragraph under STEP 6 Page 4 7 deleted second paragraph under STEP 4 Page 4 10 start of text for new section Using a Lucas Deeco Model ST 2200 Page 5 2 added reference to Lucas Deeco ST 2200 to paragraph one of STEP 6 In second paragraph of STEP 6 changed 200 000 bytes to 120 000 bytes e Page 5 3 added entry for LUDCO to table e Page 5 4 in first paragraph under STEP 7 added ADS_PC lt demo system gt PCM to directories Change text in CAUTION to read Version 2 or later Page 5 5 added Section 2 Using the Operator Interface Products Menu Page 5 7 changed STEP 9 to Section 3 Configuring PCOP to ADC Communications changed ADC_SET
91. the accuracy completeness sufficiency or usefulness of the information contained herein No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc Alarm Master CIMSTAR Helpmate PROMACRO Series Six CIMPLICITY GEnet Logicmaster Series One Series 90 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Genius Modelmaster Series Three VuMaster CIMPLICITYPowerTRAC GeniusPowerTRAC ProLoop Series Five Workmaster Copyright 1990 1994 GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc All Rights Reserved Preface This manual provides setup installation and configuration information needed to install and use the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software to build a custom operator interface system for the Series 90 70 or Series 90 30 Model 331 or Model 341 Programmable Logic Controller The CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software runs on the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor ADC module and communicates over the Series 90 70 or Series 90 30 PLCs backplane to monitor and optionally modify data tables in the PLC This manual also contains information on viewing demonstration systems and step by step development tutorials to acquaint you with the features and capabilities of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS system Revisions to This Manual GFK 0499 Changes have been made to this manual to reflect the features of Version 4 01 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Emphasis has been changed from the ADC Based Builder to using
92. the choice of viewing additional help text or of closing the help window ADS Help Facility Explained The help information related to a particular help index may be broken over multiple pages by specifying the page break PAGE Chaining to another group of help screens identified by another unique index is made possible via the chain specifier CHAIN lt index gt where again lt index gt is a value between 1 and 999 Press RETURN for more QUIT to continue Press F1 for basic information on how to use the online facility including the use of multiple pages and chaining Press F2 for information only on how to use chaining within the online help facility Chapter 9 The ADS Help Utility 9 3 9 4 Press the Enter key again Note that the help screen originally accessed by pressing the F2 key has been chained to after originally pressing the F1 key As this is last available help screen the user is only given the option of pressing the Enter key which will close the help window ADS Help Facility Explained Chaining to another help index allows you to access common help information from multiple unique starting points without the need to replicate the information for each instance of use Care must be taken however to avoid chaining help indices together into an infinite loop Press RETURN to continue Press F1 for basic information on how to use the online facility including the
93. the end of the line or column in the given direction So pressing the F3 key to begin the select operation followed by the key sequences Insert gt and Insert J results in the entire screen being selected Pressing the F5 key then draws the desired rectangle The following text should be typed onto the screen lt Row Column gt Text To Type There lt 2 30 gt OPTIONS MENU lt 4 4 gt F1 View the PLC Fault Table lt 4 34 gt XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX lt 5 4 gt F2 View the I O Fault Table lt 5 34 gt XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX lt 7 3 gt F14 Return to the main screen lt 9 3 gt F15 Exit the system and hard reset the ADC module OPTIONS MENU Uieu the PLC Fault Table XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX gt View the 170 Fault Table XXXXXXxXXAKXARAKAAAK Return to the main screen Exit the system and hard reset the ADC module 188 Row amp Col amp Text Static 6 54 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Using the techniques learned beginning with step 8 regarding the creation of dynamic objects position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 4 34 gt and create a dynamic object spanning the sequence of 19 X s The data entry form should be filled out as indicated below OPTIONS MENU View the PLC Fault Table View the 1 0 Fault Table XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXAK Return to the main screen Exi Create Dynamic Object Name PLC_FLT_STAT Dat
94. the screen Type in NORMAL_HIGHas the display format name Since the value the display format will operate on is a WORD value select WORD as the input data type Fora monochrome target terminal you will probably want to display the temperature with NORMAL video attributes for 0 to 79 and with the BOLD video attribute for 80 to 100 In the case of a color terminal you may want to select a color such as YELLOW for 0 to 79 and RED for 80 to 100 999 Deg F C32 212 Edit degrees F Name Data Type Range 6 79 80 100 DD MMM YY HH MM SS VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style Pen a display format NORMAL_HIGH WORD Action normal Completing the display format data entry form returns you to the bar chart data entry form Note that rather than pressing the Enter key several times to complete the form you can just press the Alt F10 key which will immediately complete and save the form GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 103 The remainder of the bar chart data entry form is correct except that the minimum value needs to be changed to 0 On color terminals the foreground and background color specifications give you the ability to affect the foreground and background colors of the bar chart differently than those of the screen it appears on DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 Z1 Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE I
95. to connect to a Workmaster II computer or an IBM or compatible Personal Computer typically only needed for initial installation or for archiving a user built system or optionally to a printer Port 2 connects to the display device that will function as the terminal for the system Note that when using a computer as the terminal device the simplest configuration would be to use it connected to Port 1 since it must be connected to Port 1 to initially install the ADS Software anyway and optionally connect the printer to Port 2 Figure 1 1 is a block diagram of a typical hardware configuration supporting the ADS software MegaBasic is a trademark of Christopher Cochran OptiBASIC is a trademark of Nematron Corporation IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation 1 1 a44526 SERIES 90 CPU BACKPLANE ADC PORT 1 PORT 2 IBM PC XT AT OR PS 2 PRINTER TERMINAL Figure 1 1 Typical CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Hardware Configuration In a Series 90 70 PLC system the ADC module may reside in either the main rack with the CPU or in an expansion rack In a Series 90 30 PLC system the ADC module must reside in a model 331 CPU baseplate it cannot reside in an expansion baseplate All communications between the ADC module and the CPU are carried out over the rack s backplane The Workmaster II IBM PC
96. to access the folder selection screen Section 1 Downloading the Software to the ADC Module Use These steps to Download the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software Connect the serial port of your computer to PORT 1 of the ADC module Series 90 70 PLC Users PORT 1 on the ADC module is the top port see the label inside of the module s door Series 90 30 PLC User s PORT 1 is labeled on the T end of the Wye cable see the figure on page 3 5 in this manual GFK 0499 6 1 6 2 Select one of the cables listed in the table below All 3 of these cables are included in your CIMPLICITY 90 ADS system package If Your Computer is You Use This Cable AGE Fanuc Workmaster I or an IBM PS 2 IC690CBL705 ADC PCMtoWorkmasterlII AGE Fanuc Workmaster or an IBM PC XT IC690CBL701 ADC PCMtoWorkmaster An IBM PC AT personal computer IC690CBL702 ADC PCMtoPC AT Make sure that the power is ON to your PLC Hard reset the ADC module by pressing the Reset Restart pushbutton on the front of the module continuously for more than 5 seconds Now type the following command at the MS DOS prompt OI_MENU Pull down the ADS menu and select the PCOP ADS menu option If you didn t execute a demonstration system as described in the previous chapter you should refer back to Section 2 in Chapter 5 for information on using the Operator Interface Products Menu The following screen will be displayed GE FA
97. to select either the Development version or the Execute Only version of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software By default the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS installation and environment selection screen is set to install the Development version of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software onto the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module Pressing the Tab key allows you to toggle between Development and Execute Only Choose the Execute Only environment by pressing the Tab key CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL f FOLDER UTILTY eave load fe E fe mel a Be o o Press Tab Shft TAB to select DEVELOPMENT or EXECUTE ONLY CIMPLICITY M 960 ADS ADS Environment CDEVELOPMENT or EXECUTE ONLY System Name Terminal Table Printer Table Listing of Files in ADS Folder lt PC NPCOPNADS PCM ADS_MENU ENU ADSDEU DAT ADSSETUP 361 SPOOL ENU ADSDM ENU PCMEXEC BAT ADSEXE DAT OIT TBL ADSB EXE ADSDM EXE ADSE EXE ADSPRNT EXE ADS_MENU ADS_RUN MENU EXE SPOOL EXE STARTUP EXE ADSBM HLP README 201 ADS CDF ADSFLT EXE ADSPID EXE MIBM TEL MINI TBL TCOIT TEL Total Bytes Available 57741312 Folder Size 983324 Bytes lt lt Press Enter Key to Begin ADS Installation gt gt lt EXECUTE ONLY fields default to RAM EMPTY OIT TBL ASCII TBL respectively gt lt lt Press PgUp or PgDn Key to Scroll Listing of Files gt gt ONLINE FACTORY D NADS_PCNTUTOR PCM INSERT PCM ID RACK SLOT PLC ID Gi GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Cr
98. to use with the ADS Version 2 or later software it MUST be converted first to the new file formats used by the Version 2 or later software Refer to Appendix E Converting a Version 1 System to Version 2 for more details You should verify that you have a PATH statement in the AUTOEXEC BAT file resident at the root of your computer s hard drive The directory PCOP BAT should be included as part of the PATH specification If not it must be added in order to properly execute the PCOP and ADS software Consult your MS DOS manual for details on the PATH statement CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 2 Using the Operator Interface Products Menu In the sections which follow you will need to use several ADS utility programs to complete the configuration of your system The Operator Interface Products Menu provides a simple interface for accessing each of the utilities you will need Only the information needed to complete your initial system configuration is provided here For details on all the capabilities of the Operator Interface Products Menu see Chapter 11 To access the Operator Interface Products Menu either press the OI softkey on the Logicmaster 90 main menu or type in the command OI_MENU at the MS DOS prompt In either case you should see the following initial display DER Digital Event Recorder ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 ADS EXIT Return to LM98 Main Men
99. use of multiple pages and chaining Press F2 for information only on how to use chaining within the online help facility Each help entry point is defined by specifying a unique index for it and is prefaced with the character The index you specify is the same one you will reference in a HELP command within your ADS operator interface system Following the help index is the title to be displayed at the top of the help display Note that the size and positioning of the help screen on your terminal display is calculated based on the row depth and the column width of the longest line of text for that entry Help related to a single help index may be broken up over multiple pages by using the PAGE command to force a page break All pages in a group will be sized based on the largest page in the group You can chain to help which is normally accessed by a different help index by using the CHAIN inducer where you indicate which new index to use CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 After creating your help text file you must convert it to a form that the ADS Executor see chapter 13 in the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference Manual can understand You can do this by using the ADS Create Help Utility There are two methods for entering the ADS Create Help Utility The preferred method is to use the Operator Interface Products Menu as shown in the screen below Refer to Chapter 11 of this
100. wee z RS 232 a44225 25 PIN FEMALE ee p CONNECTOR PINI 2 0 INCH 0 INCH LABEL PORT1 amp Net Ne PORT2 PCM COMM CABLE IC693CBL305B 9 6 T T A PIN 1 RS 232 RS 232 RS 485 PIN1 25 PIN MALE CONNECTOR Figure C 6 WYE Cable Connections for the Series 90 30 ADC Appendix C Appendix Title 25 PIN FEMALE CONNECTOR C 5 In order to use an RS 232 cable on port 2 of the Series 90 30 either a special cable must be made according to the serial port pin assignments shown above or a WYE cable must be used Standard Series 90 70 ADC cables can be used for the Series 90 30 ADC when the WYE cable is used Connecting an OIT to the ADC The appropriate RS 232 and RS 485 cable connections from the ADC module s Port 2 to an OITs RS 232 port are shown in the following figures PIN PIN a44698 0 TA 1 SHLD 0 SERIES OIT ol TxD 2 3 RXD o 90 30 0 RXD 3 mi i 2 TXD ol OR o RTS 4 E 5 CTS o 90 70 PRIMARY 0 0 CTS 5 TI TI 20 DTR 0 0 ADC PORT 1 2 GND 7 im im 7 GND E o DTR 20 8 DCD 0 051 DeD 8 9 WT EO 05 PORT2 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN 25 PIN MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE Figure C 7 ADC Port 2 Connection to an OIT RS 232 PIN PIN a45077 So 24 TERM RD LY 0 A D 0 SD A 23 X X 13 RD A KG o SERIES or 0 SBE 1 25 RD B
101. your first screen Select the Screen Operations submenu either by pressing the T or J cursor keys to select its menu entry and then pressing the Enter key to select it or alternately by just pressing the S key Throughout the remainder of this tutorial when you are asked to select a menu item you should either cursor to that item and then press the Enter key or alternatively you may just press the letter corresponding to the first letter of the menu item Where more that one menu item begins with the same first character the topmost item in the menu list would be selected by pressing its corresponding first letter ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI CCOM2 gt Default Scan Rate 1 Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate a Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN BG s 58 s New screen Modify screen Screen paint Delete screen Copy screen Key assignments List screens Print screen details Touch screen assignments Select the New Screens menu item to open up the create screen data entry form ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate 1 Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate B Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN G s 58 s Create Screen Screen Name Screen Number Start Row 1 Rows 15 Start Column 1 Colum
102. 0 4 The first condition is that the database for the system selected does not exist in which case the database will be constructed If the build prompt has not been disabled the following screen will be displayed Les CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder Nads_pcNtutor pcm The cross referenced database does not exist for this system Press lt return gt to begin building the screens alarm pages reports alarm sources Print options data sources File operations display formats Start printout translation entries Exit eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts Press the Return key to begin the process of building the database The following screen will be displayed ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder Nads_pcNtutor pcm Building the data base will take several minutes Please wait Processing file coit cfg file count 1 44 screens alarm pages reports alarm sources Print options data sources File operations display formats Start printout translation entries Exit eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts processing data sources for expanded records The file currently being processed is displayed along with a file count The file count shows two numbers The first number is the count of the number of files that have been processed including the file currently being processe
103. 00 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C Uieu Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu Col Text Static 6 24 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Use the same technique to draw a box around some text on the screen Position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 5 41 gt press the F3 key to begin the selection of the region move the cursor first to lt 5 79 gt and then to lt 11 79 gt Press the F5 key to draw the desired rectangle DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F C32 212 VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C lt O 100 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu Col Text Static GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 25 Applying Video Attributes to a Region You can use a similar technique to apply a video attribute to a region of text Position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 12 55 gt press the F3 key to begin the selection of the region move the cursor first to lt 12 77 gt and then to lt 15 77 gt Press the F1 key to bring up the video attributes menu Reverse Blink DD MMM YY HH MM SS Underscore UALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style gt 999 Deg
104. 00 VT100 IBM PC with color display CIBM CIBM IBM PC with monochrome display MIBM MIBM Nematron Color OptiTOUCH TCOIT TCOIT Nematron Monochrome OptiTOUCH TMOIT TMOIT Lucas Deeco ST 2200 LUDCO LUDCO The printer table field does not need to be filled out After the system name and terminal table fields have been filled in press Enter to begin installing the ADS software on the ADC module The CIMPLICITY 90 ADS files will now be loaded onto the ADC module A prompt is displayed near the top of the screen indicating that the procedure will take several minutes and requesting that you confirm the install Press the Y key to continue with the installation 5 18 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 Default port settings are downloaded to the ADC module during the installation they are as shown below Table 5 4 Serial Port Default Settings Setting Port 1 Port 2 Interface RS232 Data Rate 19200 Flow Control Software Bits Character 8 8 After your installation is complete refer to Appendix D if you want to modify the default port settings The installation is complete when your computer displays the screen shown below TERMF terminal emulator copyright 1988 1989 GE Fanuc Press ALT Z keys to return to programmer main menu The screen shown above indicates that your computer has been placed in Terminal Emulation File Server mode This is called TERMF and is
105. 0ooodaq Press the Enter key to access the Modify System Parameters data entry form ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal MPC lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports I Alarm sources Modify System Params Data sources System Name jo Display formats Terminal MPC Translations entries Terminal Device COM2 Eng Unit Conv entries Printer Device NULL Lookup table entries Default Scan rate 1 08 Command scripts Default Alarm Scan rate 1 68 Startup screen The Enter key is used to move from field to field within the data entry form when on the last field of the form pressing the Enter key will close the data entry form saving 6 80 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 its contents Use the Esc key to cancel the entry of data into the form The Ctrl X key is used to clear the contents of a field You should fill in the Terminal and Terminal Device fields of the form per table 5 2 It is suggested that you also change the Default Alarm Scan rate field to 0 5 Note that some fields such as the Terminal Device field present you with a menu of choices to pick from The T and J cursor keys are used to highlight the desired choice pressing the Enter key selects it
106. 1 54 gt Press the F5 key to draw the desired reverse video rectangle Next move the cursor to position lt 9 66 gt and press the F3 key to begin selection of the region move the cursor to position lt 9 78 gt and then down to position lt 11 78 gt Again press the F5 key to draw the rectangle GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 89 The screen will then appear as shown below DD MM YY H MM SS 999 Deg F 32 21D Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style i ri F OPEN VALVE 999 Deg C CG 100 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL PAGE PAGE ALARMS TUTOR 1 Row Col amp Text Static Note that the buttons have been placed so that they fall totally within adjacent touch areas This was not done by accident Whenever placing text on a screen for a touch terminal you must be aware of where your touch regions will be placed Since we have completed drawing our reverse video rectangles we need to reset the video attributes back to normal Press the Alt F1 key to accomplish this 6 90 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Applying Video Attributes to a Region You can use a similar technique to apply a video attribute to a region of text Position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 6 5 gt press the F3 key to
107. 1800 Output Data Type STRING F2 edit degrees C INPUT RANGE OUTPUT VALUE xOPEN CLOSED CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 After completing the data entry form for the lookup table entry you will be returned to the dynamic object s data entry form It can now be completed as shown below DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS KXXXXXXXI Cstatus style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C CO 180 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page Create Dynamic Ob ject VALUVE_STATUS Data Source VALUE Additional Calc OPEN CLOSED Display Format Display Value Y CYN Hex Notation Left Justify Zero Fill Available for Edit Lookup table entry added to system Dynamic Control of Video Attributes Assigned Static Text We also want to view the valve s status in a second way Whenever the valve is open we want to see the text VALVE IS CLOSED displayed in normal video when closed we want to see it displayed in reverse video Position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 8 42 gt the leftmost character V in the text string Press the Alt F7 key to begin defining the dynamic object move the cursor right until it is in column 58 of row 8 rightmost character and then press the F7 key to complete the selection of the dynamic object Give the dynamic object a n
108. 2 Section 1 Installing the Series 90 30 ADC Module 3 3 Section 2 Configuring the ADC Module in Logicmaster 90 30 Softwat sises a e ere tare Sew SA earn ree 3 8 Chapter 4 Setting Up and Connecting the Display Terminal 4 1 Section 1 Using a GE Fanuc Monochrome or Color OIT 4 2 Section 2 Using a GE Fanuc MINI OIT or Mini Touch OIT 4 5 Section 3 Using a VT100 Standard Terminal 4 7 Section 4 Using a Monochrome or Color IBM Personal Computer or Compatible for the Display Terminal 4 8 Section 5 Using a Lucas Deeco Model ST 2200 4 10 Chapter 5 Installing the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software 5 1 Section 1 Installing CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software Onto Your Computer sesos ete tease caste ces Steers 5 1 Section 2 Using the Operator Interface Products Menu 5 5 Section 3 Configuring PCOP to ADC Communications 5 7 Section 4 Using the ADS Software Setup Utility 5 9 Section 5 Executing a Demonstration System on the ADC MOduUle scssieasiewads EEE ETER 5 14 Use These Steps to Download the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software 5 14 GFK 0499D CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 ix Contents Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System cece ee cc eeeceees 6 1 Section 1 Downloading the Software to the ADC Module 6 1 Use These steps to Dow
109. 3 AK6 AK14 POPSCN 100 AK7 AK15 EXIT AK8 ALARM PAGE LISTING Alarm Page 1 VLV_ALRM Start Row 6 End Row 15 Start Column 9 End Column 47 Foreground BLACK Background WHITE Heading VALVE ALARM EXAMPLES ALARM SOURCE LISTING Alarm Source AUTO_ACK Alarm Source LATCHED Data Type STATE Data Type STATE Location 22 0 Location 22 0 Scan Rate Additional Calc Alarm Pages 1 Flags Timestamp Auto ack Range ON Text Auto ack example Action AlarmSource UNLATCHED Data Type STATE Location Z2 0 Sten Bale 2 Additional Calc Alarm Pages 1 Flags Timestamp Range ON Text Unlatched example Action GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System Scan Rate Additional Calc Alarm Pages 1 Flags Timestamp Latched ON Latched example LATCHED_CMDS Range Texty Action 6 75 DATA SOURCE LISTING DataSource IO_FAULTS Data Source PLC_DATE Data Type BYTE Data Type LONGWORD Location PLC_STATUS 5 PLC_STATUS 3 Location DATE Scan Rate Scan Rate 00 00 01 00 Additional Calc STATUS_TEXT Additional Calc Data Source PLC_FAULTS Data Source PLC_TIME Data Type BYTE Data Type LONGWORD Location PLC_STATUS 4 PLC_STATUS 2 Location TIME Scan Rate Scan Rate 00 00 01 00 Additional Calc STATUS_TEXT Additional Calc Data Source TEMPERATURE Data Source VALVE Data Type WORD Data Type S
110. 3 AK4 PLCSETB Z2 0 0 AK5 PLCSETB Z2 0 1 AK6 AK7 PSHALM 1 AK8 POPALM 1 AK9 ACK_ALARM PLCSETW Z1 0 AK10 AK11 AK12 AK13 AK14 PSHSCN 100 AK15 Toucoinbefinitions 128 128 128 131 r31 132 132 129 129 129 134 135 136 141 6 148 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 ScreerNumber 100 OPTIONS Start Row 5 End Row 15 Start Column 6 End Column 75 Image NORMAL Background BLACK Foreground WHITE Dynamic Object IO_FLT_STAT Dynamic Object PLC_FLT_STAT Start Row 4 End Row 4 Start Row 4 End Row 4 Start Column 44 End Column 62 Start Column 12 End Column 30 Data Source IO_FAULTS Data Source PLC_FAULTS Additional Calc Additional Calc Display Format STATUS_STRNG Display Format STATUS_STRNG Display Value Yes Left_justify Display Value Yes Left_justify Avail for Edit No Avail for Edit No 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 EKIRI INNIN E a P EA E ES E EI E i SO SE a SATIE E ATT E T E i She a ei tie ae ee ee OPT TONING SSS SSeS S SS See Se View the PLC Fault Table View the I O Fault Table XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXK XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXK Return to the main screen Exit the system and hard reset the ADC module Kegefinitions AK1 PLC_FAULT AK2 IO_FAULT K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 AK10 AK11 AK12 AK13 AK14 POPSCN 100 AK15 EXIT DO DP PP
111. 41 for details on the operation of the Menu The Builder option is used to create and modify ADS operator interface systems Except in the case of the Mini OIT and the Touch Mini OIT terminals the Builder is typically executed on the target terminal See Chapters 2 through 12 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference manual GFK 0641 for more details on the operation of the Builder The Database Printing option provides a method for obtaining a listing of your ADS operator interface system It can only be selected if the Builder option is also selected Selecting the database printing option automatically selects the print spooler option See Chapters 3 through 10 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference manual GFK 0641 for more details on the operation of Database Printing The Online Help option enables an extensive help facility for the Builder It can only be selected if the Builder option is selected See Chapter 2 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference manual GFK 0641 for more details on the operation of Online Help The Executor option is used to execute an existing ADS operator interface system on the target terminal See Chapter 13 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference manual GFK 0641 for more details on the operation of the Executor The Print Spooler option is used to output text to a printer It is automatically selected if you have also selected the Database Printing option see above You will also want to select it if you intend to log alarms
112. 6 Copying an Alarm Source Often many of your alarm sources will be very similar in their definition differing only in PLC location and perhaps in the setting of certain flags In such cases it is easier to start with an existing alarm source and then modify it rather than creating it completely from scratch In our case our remaining two alarm sources will be very similar to alarm source UNLATCHED which we just finished creating In order to use it as our template we must make a copy of it Select the Copy an alarm source menu option and specify UNLATCHED as the alarm source to be copied ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate B8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Alarm Sources ADS Print Destination STDPRN UNLATCHED New alarm source Modify an alarm source Delete an alarm source View current sources List sources Print sources Enter the name of the Alarm source to copy MESIN Pressing the Enter key opens up an alarm source data entry form with all fields filled out identically to those of alarm source UNLATCHED ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name Source Data Type STATE PLC Location Z2 6 Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC gt Additional Calc Range ON Action Text Unlatched example Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp Y Lat
113. 60 50 80 Nulls after CR 0 10 Form Feed Y Y N Listing format S Stdtext Postscript Printer Setup Control Sequences Leading Trailing translation entries PID listing option eng units conversions Xref listing options lookup table entries Write print options to file command scripts For the fields that show the choices to the right the user can either type in the choice or press the Tab key to toggle through the choices Paper Width 80 132 The entry for paper width determines the number of characters that will be printed on a line If the printer is setup for standard 8 1 2 wide paper select 80 characters for the paper width If the printer uses 11 or wider paper you can select either 80 or 132 characters Lines Page 50 80 The default value for the number of lines to be printed on a page is 60 This can be changed to be from 50 to 80 lines per page If an associated group of lines will not fit on one page the system will command the printer to advance to the next page after the number of lines specified by this entry Note that some printers automatically insert a form feed after printing a certain number of lines typically 66 If the printer has this feature specify a shorter page length to prevent an automatic page eject Form Feed Y N This selection determines whether the system automatically inserts an ASCII form feed lt FF gt character at the end of a page This
114. 7ACC701 is installed as shown in Figure 3 1 This battery maintains user memory when power is removed from the PLC If a low battery is detected it is reported in the PLC fault table When replacing a battery be sure to install the new battery in the unused battery connector before removing and discarding the old battery Note When the ADC will be stored for an extended period of time the battery should first be disconnected However if it is to be stored as a spare for a running application you may want to retain memory already stored on the module If this is the case you would keep the battery connected The shelf life of the lithium battery when not connected on the ADC is 10 years at 20 C 68 F If the battery is connected on an ADC module to retain memory while the GFK 0499 Chapter 3 Getting Started Series 90 30 PLC Users 3 3 module is being stored the life of the battery is about 6 months without power applied Do not discard the lithium battery in fire Do not attempt to recharge the battery Do not short the battery The battery may burst or burn or release hazardous materials Three LED Indicators The three LED indicators as shown in Figure 3 1 are mounted along the top front edge of the ADC board Module OK OK LED The MODULE OK OK LED indicates the current status of the ADC board It has three possible conditions Off When the LED is off the ADC is not functioning This is the result of a
115. 8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Load system Save system to disk Modify current directory Refresh system in RAM Clear system Print destination QrPOrPFNDMROOAN When you execute this menu option your computer screen will change to the terminal emulation screen and automatically soft reset the ADC module Once on this screen you can return to the Builder by pressing the Alt Z key You should now begin to see text appearing on your target terminal s screen indicating that the various components of the ADS software have begun to execute and that the screens making up your system are being processed by the software Following that your startup screen will be displayed on the module The display should be similar to the following screen with the time and date fields on the screen displaying the time and date per the PLC CPUs real time clock 3 Apr 88 23 33 66 32 Deg F C32 212 Edit degrees F VALVE IS 0PEN Cstatus style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style Deg C CO 100 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface Sy
116. ANUC AUTOMATION INCORPORATED PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE COPYRIGHT 1988 1989 GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC Published in only a limited copyright sense and all rights including trade secret rights are reserved Unauthorized use of this information or program is strictly prohibited PCOP Version ONL INE FACTORY lt lt Press DHAJ to continue gt gt Verify that the system is ONLINE in the bottom center of the screen as shown If OFFLINE is displayed hard reset the module again as described in STEP 2 GFK 0499 Chapter 5 Installing the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software 5 15 When ONLINE is displayed press the Enter key to continue The screen shown below will be displayed next CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL f FOLDER UTILTY I E efdel fe a E A T A o oT Enter name of existing or neu program folder SELECT OR CREATE A PROGRAM FOLDER Progran Folder Folders Currently in Drawer D ADS_PC DEMO PCM LUDCO PCM CIBM PCM COIT PCM MOIT PCM MINI PCM TMINI PCM UT188 PCM MIBM PCM TCOIT PCM lt lt Press Enter Key to Start the Select Function gt gt NOTE A folder extension of PCM is required If an extension is not provided an extension of PCM will be added any other extension is an error ONLINE FACTORY INSERT PCM ID RACK SLOT PLC ID OAN In this screen you are prompted to enter the name of a CIMPLICITY 90 ADS program folder The following screen will be displayed
117. ATUS 3 Note that this time when you open up the object list window with the Additional Calculation field in the data source selected you find that the needed lookup table entry STATUS_TEXT already exists Use the cursor keys to highlight it and then press the Enter key to pick it for inclusion in the data source OPTIONS MENU View the PLC Fault Table XXXXXXXXXXX Additional Calculation View the 1 0 Fault Table EEEEEEEEES DEGC_TO_DEGF CTrans1 gt OPEN_CLOSED CLookup gt Return to the main screen STATUS_TEXT Lookup Create Lookup Exi Copy Dynamic Create Translation Name IO FLT STAT Create EUC Data Source IO_FAULTS Additional Calc Create a data s Name IO_FAULTS Source Data Type BYTE Source Location PLC_STATUSLS Scan Rate x Additional Calc CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 After completing the data source and the dynamic object the OPTIONS screen is now complete Press the Alt F10 key to exit the screen painter while saving the work you have done Select the Key Assignments menu option specifying the newly created screen 100 Fill out the key assignments as shown below ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Screen key assignments for OPTIONS lt 100 gt PLC_FAULTC gt IO_FAULTC gt POPSCNC 18 gt EXITO The key assignment for function key F1 PLC_FAULT indicates that the PLC fault table screen sho
118. BAT is in the computer s DOS Path this is done as part of the PCOP installation you may access TERMF directly by typing IBM_TERM Enter at the DOS prompt If you intend to use the file transfer capabilities of TERMF when accessing it directly via IBM_TERM BAT make sure that you first set default to the proper subdirectory on your computer s hard disk by using the DOS CD command and then execute IBM_TERM BAT If you have previously used the TERMSET program to create a USER communications setup file PCOP BATMADS_USER DAT you can use that file in TERMF by choosing the USER option LUSH EXIT BUILD PCOP ADS DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 DS TERMSET CREATHLP EXIT Return to LM98 Main Menu USER lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 82 or by either of the commands ADS USER or IBM_TERM USER If the USER parameter is not specified the standard communication setup file PCOP BA ADS_TERM IAT will be used CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Appendix GFK 0499 B ASCII Codes The Mini OIT and most other terminals use standard ASCII codes for display and communication
119. BM TAR Host Computer Selections Host Computer Monitor MONOCHROME COLOR Host Computer Character Set Normal Host Printer Type Generic ASCII Printer PAGE 2 OF 2 You can use the cursor keys to select your choice of either Monochrome or Color and then press the Enter key or just press the M or C key M for monochrome C for color Your choice will be recorded for the next time you run the ADS set up package Neither the host computer character set nor the host printer type need be changed at this time Pressing the Enter key twice will complete the Host Computer Selections modifications The target terminal selection tells ADS where it should expect to find your target display terminal Its location will depend on the type of terminal you are using Refer to the following table to determine the selection that is right for your terminal GFK 0499 Chapter 5 Installing the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software 5 11 Table 5 2 Target Terminal Port Selection Terminal Terminal Current Target Table Terminal Port Selection GE Fanuc color OIT COM2 GE Fanuc monochrome OIT COM2 Nematron OptiTOUCH color terminal COM2 Nematron OptiTOUCH monochrome terminal COM2 GE Fanuc Mini OIT COM2 GE Fanuc Mini Touch OIT COM2 VT100 COM2 Lucas Deeco ST 2200 COM2 IBM PC with color display CIBM COM1 IBM PC with monochrome display MIBM COM1 If you need to change the default setting of COM2 either cursor to the Targe
120. BM PC XT computer with a monochrome or color display Workmaster II or IBM PC AT PS 2 or compatible computer with a monochrome or color display Nematron 12 color OptiTOUCH terminal IWS 1511T or IWS 1513T Nematron 12 monochrome OptiTOUCH terminal IWS 1011T or IWS 1013T Lucas Deeco ST 2200 terminal The first step in the installation procedure is to physically install the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module in a Series 90 30 baseplate and verify that it is working properly 3 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 1 Installing the Series 90 30 ADC Module The following steps should be followed for installation of the ADC module in your Series 90 30 PLC Remember the ADC can only be installed in a Model 331 or Model 341 Series 90 30 PLC Remove the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module from its box Refer to Figure 3 1 and become familiar with the location of the items on the module described following the figure a44535 ADC311 OK BDOK C COPROC US1 P1OK 0 US2 P2OK gt Q _ 4 A 5 RESTART t 4 o ed BATTERY gt NE O 26 26 oo 2o 296 oo 26 Oo oo 26 26 oo O Figure 3 1 Series 90 30 ADC Module Lithium Battery A lithium battery IC69
121. Builder see chapter 8 Second it is used when the building of your ADS operator interface system is nearly complete and you want the system to automatically begin executing when you power cycle the PLC or do a soft reset of the ADC module It always consists of an Executor and may optionally consist of a Print Spooler or Fault Table Module and or a PID Module with or without a loop Setup Screen In the upper righthand corner of the ADS Setup Utility s page 1 screen you will see the currently selected options for the execute only environment The numbers to the right of each selection indicate how much memory they will occupy which could otherwise be used for additional database space for your ADS system The memory remaining for the database is also displayed When the ADS software is first installed on your computer the default selections are Executor and Fault Table Module which is all that most users should initially need in fact many users will not need the Fault Tables module To change the execute only version selections execute the Execute Only Version Selections menu option The following screen will be displayed on your computer s display CIMPLICITY Ctm gt 90 ADS Setup Utility l Version 4 61 DEVELOPMENT VERSION SELECTIONS EXECUTE ONLY VERSION SELECTIONS Menu 78672 Executor 246144 Builder 257648 Fault Table Module 93136 Executor Execute Only Version Selections Max System Executor Included Not Included No
122. C based builder 8 1 Index 3 Index Index 4 OIT A 1 me monochrome 2 2 3 2 mini 2 2 B 2 mini tOUCH screen fe mini touch screen Online help option Operation overview of 6 9 Operator interface products meni accessing ADS utility programs OptiTOUCH 2 2 3 2 Organization product P PC based system executing 8 7 PC drive keeping your system on PC AT PC based builder 1 3 PC XT p 2 PC based builder accessing the builder building your system PCOP configuration 6 7 PCOP returning to A 3 PID listing option PID loop definitions listing of 10 1 PID module 7 5 PID module option 7 7 Port selection target terminal 5 12 Ports communication Series 90 30 Ports communication Series 90 70 Pre wired cables Print destination 10 10 Print options designate print destination 10 10 PID listing option 10 11 printer setup write print options to file 10 12 Xref listing options 10 11 Print spooler option 7 5 Printer setup control sequences 10 9 form feed LF with CR 10 lines page LO 8 Nulls after CR paper width Product capacity Product organization PS 2 p 2 B 2 R RAM drive keeping your system on 8 7 Reports number of Reset hard p Reset soft 2 5 B 5 Restart reset pushbutton 2 5 B Returning to PCOP A 3 Running the cross reference utility S Scan rate data or alarm s
123. CIMPLICITY 90 ADS System installation and environment selection screen shown below CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL FOLDER UTILTY 1E 2 fe I indel Bclear By o o Press Tab Shft TAB to select DEVELOPMENT or EXECUTE ONLY CIMPLICITY CTM 90 ADS ADS Environment DEVELOPMENT or EXECUTE ONLY Listing of Files in ADS Folder PC PCOPNADS PCM ADS CDF ADSB EXE ADSBM HLP ADSDEY DAT ADSDM ENY ADSDNM EXE ADSE EXE ADSEXE DAT ADS_MENU ADS_MENU ENU ADS_RUN ASCII TBL CIBM TBL COIT TBL MBX ENU MBX EXE MENU EXE MIBM TBL MINI TBL MOIT TBL OIT TBL SPOOL EXE UT100 TBL ADSE ENV SPOOL ENV Total Bytes Available 5826560 Folder Size 445901 Bytes lt lt Press Enter Key to Begin ADS Installation gt gt lt EXECUTE ONLY fields default to RAM EMPTY OIT TBL ASCII TBL respectively gt lt lt Press PgUp or PgDn Key to Scroll Listing of Files gt gt C ADS_PC DEMO PCM INSERT PCM ID RACK J SLOT PLC 1D DS This screen allows you to select either the Development version or the Execute Only version of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software By default the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS installation and environment selection screen is set to install the Development version of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software onto the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module Pressing the Tab key allows you to toggle between Development and Execute Only GFK 0499 Chapter 5 Installing the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software 5 17 Cho
124. CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 2 Managing Your Folders GFK 0499 Animportant concept for the ADS software in general and the PC based Builder in specific is that of the folder A folder is a specially named subdirectory on a computer hard disk which contains files making up one or more ADS systems databases An ADS folder must be a subdirectory which ends in an extension of PCM In general it is a good idea to keep each of your ADS systems in a separate folder for reasons discussed below One or more folders are said to reside in a drawer A drawer is just another subdirectory on your computer disk immediately one level higher than the folders it contains It can be any subdirectory including being a folder itself The concept of a drawer has most importance in the PCOP software used to install the ADS software and to manage its folders On PCOPs folder selection screen will be listed the currently selected folder along with all other folders residing in the same drawer Placing all your folders in a common drawer will aid you in quickly identifying which folders you have when entering PCOP The PC based Builder is easiest to use when you let it manage the creation and placement of the folder which will contain your system The diagram below shows how the PC based Builder will use ADS_PC as the standard drawer for all your folders and match the name of your folders with that o
125. D Cannunciator style UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS Pressing the CLOSE VALVE touch area to again close the valve triggers the alarm condition again Note that a second entry corresponding to the unlatched alarm is now in the table that a new entry for the auto acknowledge alarm is logged in the table and that the original latched alarm entry is still in the table 7 Apr 88 19 60 48 UALUE ALARM EXAMPLES 19 08 34 77 Apr 88 Unlatched example VALVE IS CLOSED Cstatus style 19 60 34 7 Apr 88 Auto ack example Cannunciator style 19 00 62 7 Apr 88 Unlatched example 19 08 62 7 Apr 88 Latched example OPEN VALVE UIEW CLOSE ACK OPTIONS ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 141 If you now press the ACK ALL ALARMS touch area to acknowledge the alarms all the alarms are now shown with a steady display indicating that they have been acknowledged Also the second command attached to that touch area has caused our temperature to be reset to 0 C VALUE 19 66 34 19 00 34 19 00 82 ALARM EXAMPLES Apr 88 Unlatched example Apr 88 Auto ack example Apr 88 Unlatched example 7 Apr 88 19 00 58 VALVE IS CLOSED Cstatus style TUREN Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE UIEN ALARM PAGE CLOSE ALARM PAGE ACK ALL ALARMS OPTIONS MENU Now press the
126. DC module and then hard reset the ADC module After hard resetting the ADC module attempt to execute your system again 10 When you have finished viewing the system on the target terminal exit it by either pressing a function key to which the EXIT command is attached or by holding down the Ctrl key on the target terminal s keyboard while simultaneously pressing the E key Alternatively you may hard reset the ADC module Within a few seconds you should see gt displayed on your computer screen 11 To return to the Builder hold down the Alt key on your computer s keyboard and simultaneously press the Z key You should see the Builder s main menu screen Repeat steps 6 through 11 above until you complete your development Keeping Your System On The PC Drive Another way to use the PC based Builder in conjunction with executing the system on the target terminal for check out is to let the system remain only on the computer PC drive while it is being built When the system is completed it can be loaded to the ADCs RAM drive so that the computer can be detached from the module The general steps to follow in building a system in this manner are listed below Note that the following steps assume that you have followed the development tuto rial in Chapter 6 so that you have a general knowledge of the Builder functionality You may also need to refer to the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference Manual GFK 0641 for specific informat
127. DPP Toucpoinbefinitions 128 129 141 141 141 141 142 142 142 142 142 142 GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 149 ScreermNumber 900 NUMKEYPD Start Row 1 Start Column 48 Image NORMAL Background BLACK 10 20 Sate e eters Hee E E E amp H H 7 8 1 9 I H H H H fe Op oe el ol H H H H PE ul ly See hol 2S al 4 4 11 oO H H Keyefinitions AK1 AK2 AK3 AK4 AK5 AK6 AK7 AK8 AK9 AK10 POPSCN 0 AK11 AK12 AK13 AK14 AK15 Toucoinbefinitions 6 150 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 End Row End Column Foreground 15 T9 WHITE 55 52 49 46 56 53 50 48 57 54 5L 45 24 13 13 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 ALARM PAGE LISTING AlarmPage 1 VLV_ALRM Start Row 5 End Row Start Column 1 End Column Foreground WHITE Background BLACK Heading VALVE ALARM EXAMPLES ALARM SOURCE LISTING AlarmSource AUTO_ACK Data Type STATE Location Z2 0 Scan Rate Additional Calc Alarm Pages 1 Flags Timestamp Auto ack Range ON Text Auto ack e
128. DS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 DS TERMSET CREATHLP EXIT Return to LM98 Main Menu XREF TERMF lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 062 Pressing the Enter key executes the menu option which in this case is the ADS Setup Utility Note that a menu option may be selected and executed in one operation by pressing the key corresponding to the first letter of the menu option name for example pressing the letter A in our example for the ADS Setup Utility CIMPLICITY Ctm gt 90 ADS Setup Utility l Version 4 61 DEVELOPMENT VERSION SELECTIONS EXECUTE ONLY VERSION SELECTIONS Menu 78672 Executor 246144 Builder 257648 Fault Table Module 93136 Executor 199248 Max System Cbhytes 293312 Max System Cbytes 97632 Development Version Selections Execute Only Version Selections Page Z Selections Leave Setup PAGE 1 OF Z Upon exiting the executed menu option you are returned to the Operator Interface Products Menu with the appropriate product menu selected but not pulled down GEK 0499 Chapter 11 The Operator Interface Products Menu 11 3 Should you need to back out of a menu press the Esc or F10 key until you have returned to the menu level you wish to be at OE EXI
129. Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Y CY N Hex Notation Min 8 Left Justify Max 100 zero Fill Available for Edit Immediate write CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Using a Linear Translation The dynamic object is given the name DEG_F_VALUE The data source TEMPERATURE is already the correct one so it is left as specified However TEMPERATURE yields a Celsius value not the desired Fahrenheit value Given a Celsius value it may be converted to Fahrenheit by the equation F 1 8 x C 32 Thus we need to apply an Additional Calculation to the value supplied by data source TEMPERATURE With the Additional Calculation field selected press the Alt S key to open up a window of available additional calculations DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM DD MMM YY HH MM SS EEE Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS Additional Calculation 999 Deg C C 1800 F4 lt Create Translatiom F2 edit degrees C CCreate EUC Copy Dynamic Name DEG_F_ VALUE Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Y CYN Hex Notation Left Justify Zero Fill Available for Edit GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 33 Since no additional calculations exist at all much less one we c
130. E Fanuc Mini OIT or to a DIGITAL VT100 terminal PiN pin 244532 WORKMASTER II a44531 TD 2 FA 3 RD ADC Ro sk 27D IC690CBL705 h act rel a C eTa PORT cTs 5 20 DTR 0 DceD 8 gle ae 8 DCD Pee f 4PL DTR 20 e 1 SHLD i I GND 7 ey 7 GND WORKMASTER II ADC AND IBM PS 2 25 PIN 25 PIN CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Figure C 5 ADC to Workmaster Il Computer or PS 2 Computer Connect the cable s 25 pin male connector to the top serial port female connector on the front of the ADC module Then connect the cable s 9 pin or 25 pin female connector to the male RS 232 connector serial port on the selected programming device For more information on these cables refer to GFK 0359 Series 90 70 Programmable Controller Cables PCM to Programmer Wye Cable for Series 90 30 ADC A WYE cable IC693CBL305 is supplied with each Series 90 30 ADC module The purpose of the WYE cable is to separate the two ports from a single physical connector i e the cable separates the RS 232 from the RS 485 signals In addition the WYE cable makes cables used with the Series 90 70 ADC fully compatible with the Series 90 30 ADC The WYE cable is one foot in length and has a right angle connector on one end that connects to the ADC module On the other end is a dual connector with one connector for port 1 and the other for port 2 CIMPLICITY 901 ADS Alphanumeric
131. EEE Cstatus style Create a lookup table entry Name OPEN_CLOSED Input Data Type STATE Output Data Type STRING INPUT RANGE OUTPUT VALUE 999 Deg C CB OFF xOPEN Edit degree ON CLOSED CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Upon completing the data entry form for the lookup table entry you will be returned to the dynamic object s data entry form It can now be completed as shown below NSTRATION SYSTEM NSTRATION SYSTEM DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 Z129 Edit degrees F VALUE IS ARS Cstatus style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE 999 Deg C CG Create Dynamic Object UALVE_STATUS Data Source VALUE Additional Calc OPEN_CLOSED Display Format Display Value Y CY N Hex Notation Left Justify zero Fill Available for Edit Lookup table entry added to system GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 107 Dynamic Control of Video Attributes Assigned Static Text We also want to view the valve s status in a second way Whenever the valve is open we want to see the text VALVE IS CLOSED displayed in normal video when closed we want to see it displayed in reverse video Position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 7 42 gt the leftmost character V in the text string Press the Alt F7 key to begin defining the dynamic object move the cursor right until it is in c
132. Enter key completes the data entry form and returns you to the configuration operations menu Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 47 Saving the System to Disk Now we are ready to save our system in preparation for actually copying the system to the ADC module Press the Esc key to return to the main menu and then select Load Save Operations ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal COIT lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate B8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58 s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Save system to Modify current Refresh system i Execute system i Clear system Print destination QOrOrPFNAODOOe Select the Save System to Disk menu item Your system will be saved to your computer s hard disk one file at a time As each file is saved its name will be listed on the message line at the bottom of your computer screen After all files are saved a System save complete message will be displayed ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal COIT lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate B8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58 s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPR
133. FANUC GE Fanuc Automation Programmable Control Products CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual GFK 0499D March 1994 GFL 002 Warnings Cautions and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages currents temperatures or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment a Warning notice is used Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment This document is based on information available at the time of its publication While efforts have been made to be accurate the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation operation or maintenance Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty expressed implied or statutory with respect to and assumes no responsibility for
134. GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 63 6 64 A command script is used to specify a sequence of commands which will be executed when an alarm range evaluates true or by a particular function key being pressed to which the script is attached One command script can call another meaning that a very long sequence of commands triggered by a single event is possible In this example the first command will write the word value 100 to location Z1 which just happens to be the location we are using to monitor our temperature reading The second command will display the text string Look at bar chart at the bottom of the target terminal s display After completing the command script you are returned to the alarm source data entry form Change the Text field to read Latched example and set the Latched flag to Y Sour Addi Range Text Range ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name LATCHED ce Data Type STATE PLC Location 2Z2 6 Scan Rate tional Calc Latched example Text Range Text Range Text Log 71 Command sc ON Action Action Action Action lt or HH MM SS CC gt LATCHED_CNDS N Timestamp Y Latched v Notify N Auto ack N ript added to system Output text to Following alarm pages A latched alarm differs from an unlatched one in that only a single entry may appear
135. HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F Create a display format Name OFF_ON Data Type STATE Range Action OFF NORMAL ON REVERSE 6 42 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Pressing the Alt F10 key completes the definition of display format OFF_ON and returns you to the dynamic object s data entry form This time we will leave the Display Value field in the form set to N as we are not actually displaying a value instead we are only affecting video attributes This situation where a display format is controlling the video attributes assigned to a static string of text on the screen is the only situation where the Display Value field is set to N otherwise it should always be set to Y DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F C32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F TA Rae Cannunciator style 999 Deg C cd 100 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page Create Dynamic Object UALUE_ANNUN Data Source VALUE Additional Calc Display Format OFF_ON Display Value Y N Display format added to system Pressing the Enter key completes the dynamic object data entry form GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 43 Defining the Function Keys Though we haven t implemented anything for alarms or options ye
136. LC memory as it is located on the ADC module this makes the Z memory ideal for producing a tutorial as you will not need to be concerned with inadvertently changing data in your PLC Ina typical application you would reference such a value from a true PLC memory location for example R100 or AI6 DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style EEE Deg C C 1088 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 Vieu Alarm Page Create Dynamic Object Name DEG_C_VALUE Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc Create a data source Name TEMPERATURE Source Data Type WORD Source Location Zi Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc The dynamic object data entry form is completed to display a left justified value making it available to be edited within an allowable range of 0 to 100 DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style EEE Deg C CO 100 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page Create Dynamic Object Name DEG_C_VALUE Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Y CYN Hex Notation Min 8 Left Justify Max 180 Zero Fill Available for Edit Immediate write Data source added to system GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First
137. MPLICITY 90 ADS Software 5 7 EOS EXIT DER Digital Event Recorder ADS CIMPLICITY tm gt 98 ADS EXIT Return to LM90 Main Menu lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press CHome for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 62 The next step is to tell ADS some of the details of your configuration You should now proceed to Section 4 5 8 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 4 Using the ADS Software Setup Utility The ADS software may be run in a number of different configurations on a number of different terminals The ADS Setup Utility provides you a method of customizing the ADS software to fit your particular application Only the information needed to run the demonstration systems provided with the software and to follow the development tutorial in Chapter 6 is provided here For details on all the capabilities of the ADS Setup Utility see Chapter 7 With the ADS Setup Utility you will tell ADS about your host computer the computer you just installed the ADS software on your target terminal and indicate what major software features you intend to use To enter the ADS Setup Utility type the following command at the MS DOS prompt your current default disk drive should be the hard drive on wh
138. N Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Load system Modify current directory Refresh system in RAM Execute system in RAM Clear system Print destination QOrPOrPFNADOOe System save complete 6 48 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Copying the System to the ADC Module Now that the system has been saved to disk it may be copied to the ADCs RAM disk If you attempt to copy the system to the ADC module when it has not been saved to disk you will be warned of this fact and prompted to confirm that the copy should continue The copy is accomplished by selecting the Refresh system in RAM menu option The ADC module must be hard reset for this function to execute The Builder will automatically check the ADCs status before attempting to copy the files Should you see a message indicating that communications with the ADC module could not be established you should check to make sure that A the appropriate cable from your computer is connected to your ADC module and B that the module is hard reset As each file is copied to the ADC module a message is displayed on the message line so indicating that fact At the completion of the copy a Refresh Complete message will be displayed ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Term
139. N TABLE NORMAL TRANSLATION LISTING TranslatioAEGC_TO_DEGF Variables A 1 800000 B 0 C3 32 Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL 6 152 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 LOOKUP TABLE LISTING i oO Lookuplable OPEN_CLOSI Input Data Type STATE Output Data Type STRING Input Range Output Range OFF OPEN ON CLOSED COMMAND SCRIPT LISTING Commang icript LATCHED_CMDS PLCSETW Z1 100 LOGTTM Look at bar chart Lookup Table STATUS_TEXT Input Data Type BYTE Output Data Type STRING Input Range Output Range 1 TABLE HAS FAULT S 3 TABLE HAS NEW FAULT 0 255 NO FAULTS IN TABLE GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 153 Chapter Section 1 GFK 0499 ADS Setup Utility The ADS software can be run in a number of different configurations on a number of different terminals The ADS Setup Utility provides you a method for customizing the ADS software to fit your particular application During the ADS software installation process the ADS Setup Utility was copied to the hard disk of your computer It will be executed on your computer not the ADC module Entering the ADS Setup Utility There are two methods for entering the ADS Setup Utility The preferred method is to use the Operator Interface Products Menu as shown in the screen below Refer to Chapter 11 of this manual fo
140. NUC AUTOMATION INCORPORATED PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE COPYRIGHT 1988 1989 GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC Published in only a limited copyright sense and all rights including trade secret rights are reserved Unauthorized use of this information or program is strictly prohibited PCOP Version 2 06 ONL INE FACTORY lt lt Press Day to continue gt gt Verify that the system is ONLINE in the bottom center of the screen as shown IF OFFLINE is displayed hard reset the module again as described in STEP 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 When ONLINE is displayed press the Enter key to continue The screen shown below will be displayed next unless you execute the ADS command when the default MS DOS directory is a PCM folder in that case this screen will be skipped CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL FOLDER UTILTY I sel fetdel_ I SE OE 7 om o o Enter name of existing or new program folder SELECT OR CREATE A PROGRAM FOLDER Program Folder Folders Currently in Drawer C ADS_PC CONST PCM U2ZD PCM TOUCH PCM BAR PCM LOOP PCM RCKSL PCM UNIUS PCM TOIT PCM DEMO PCM FAULT PCM DEMOV PCM POWER PCM TEST PCM SAVE PCM IPC PCM STATY PCM SCAN PCM SYFLT PCM CL930 PCM STATE PCM STEST PCM STICK PCM REAL PCM JEFF PCM TEXT PCM lt lt Press Enter Key to Start the Select Function gt gt NOTE A folder extens
141. ONS MENU the PLC Fault Table the I O Fault Table TABLE HAS NEW FAULT NO FAULTS IN TABLE Return to the main screen Exit the system and hard reset the ADC module mr es a E Press the VIEW the PLC Fault Table touch area to gain access to the display of the PLC fault table Note that this display is the same as the one which can be accessed from within the Logicmaster 90 programming and configuration software packages PLC FAULT TABLE TOP FAULT DISPLAYED 6616 TABLE LAST CLEARED 18 69 52 TOTAL FAULTS 96899 ENTRIES OVERFLOWED PLC DATE TIME 18 83 47 FAULT FAULT TIME LOCATION DESCRIPTION H M S Reset of addition of or extra option module 84 07 17 58 09 Reset of addition of or extra option module 04 07 17 56 57 Reset of addition of or extra option module 84 07 17 56 23 Reset of addition of or extra option module 84 07 17 55 38 CLEAR PRINT EREFRSH 1 0 EFULL DOUN KUP WPC DOUNSPG UP MAXIT CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Pressing the EXIT touch area returns you to the options screen Note that the description for the PLC fault table has changed from Table has new fault to Table has fault s this change is due to you viewing the PLC fault table 7 Apr 88 18 64 29 OPTIONS MENU the PLC Fault Table the I O Fault Table TABLE HAS FAULTCS gt NO FAULTS IN TABLE Return to the main screen Exit the system and hard reset the ADC mo
142. S CLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE 999 Deg C CG Create Bar Chart DEG_C_BAR Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc Display Format NORMAL_HIGH Direction UP Minimum Value Maximum Value 166 6008 Foreground WHITE Background BLACK Display format added to system 6 104 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Using a Lookup Table Having completed what we want to do in order to monitor temperature we next need to set up monitoring of the valve which may be in either of two states open 0 or closed 1 For one status indicator we want to see either OPEN or CLOSED displayed on the screen Position the cursor on the X at lt row column gt position lt 6 51 gt and press the Alt F7 key to begin defining a dynamic object Move the cursor right to position it on the rightmost X column 58 and then press the F7 key to complete the selection of the dynamic object Give the dynamic object a name of VALVE_STATUS DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 Z1 Edit degrees F VALUE IS EEEEEES Cstatus style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE 999 Deg C CG Create Dynamic Object TEES Data Source Additional Calc Display Format Display Value GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 105 6 106 Now enter a data source name of VALVE and press the Enter
143. S BAT allows you to access the PCOP programming software TERMF is accessible from its main menu IBM_TERM BAT runs the TERMF program directly TypicallyADS BAT will be used during the development of your ADS operator interface system and IBM_TERM BAT when you have set your ADS software up to automatically begin executing when the ADC module is reset or power cycled This completes the installation of your IBM monochrome or color terminal Go on to Chapter 5 which tells you how to copy the ADS software onto your computer and install it on your ADC modules 4 8 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 If you used a computer as a terminal with ADS software Versions 1 01 1 02 1 03 or 1 04 there is an additional change you will need to make With ADS V1 software your computer had to be connected to Port 2 of the ADC module for it to function as a terminal Typically the handshaking for Port 2 was set to hardware rather than the default of software and the fileserver was set up to execute on Port 2 rather than the default of Port 1 These settings need to be returned to their defaults as you will now be able to leave your computer attached to Port 1 when using it as a terminal To use the default values again type the following command in at the MS DOS prompt and press the Enter key COPXKPCOP BAT ADS_CDEORG PCOP ADS PCM ADS CDF Chapter 4 Setting Up and Connecting the Display Terminal 4 9 Secti
144. Screens Default Scan Rate B8 s Default Alarm Scan Rate 58 s Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN MAIN c D NUMKEYPD 900 I Create Screen Screen Name Screen Number Start Row Start Column Image Foreground Background OPTIONS 190 5 Rows 10 6 Columns 70 CNorm Rev Trans WHITE BLACK L Press the Enter key to enter the screen painter Press the Delete key to toggle on the touch point grid Using the technique employed in step 6 for drawing rectangles draw a rectangle around the outer edges of the screen Note that if you press the Insert key before pressing a cursor key the result is go to the end of the line or column in the given direction So pressing the F3 key to begin the select operation followed by the key sequences Insert and Insert J results in the entire screen being selected Pressing the F5 key then draws the desired rectangle The following text should be typed onto the screen lt Row Column gt Text to Type There lt 1 30 gt OPTIONS MENU lt 3 6 gt View lt 3 12 gt the PLC Fault Table lt 3 38 gt View lt 3 44 gt the I O Fault Table lt 4 12 gt XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX lt 4 44 gt XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX lt 6 23 gt Return to the main screen lt 9 13 gt Exit the system and hard reset the ADC module GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 127 Using th
145. T DER Digital Event Recorder ADS CIMPLICITY lt tm gt 98 ADS EXIT Return to LM9 Main Menu lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt gt lt lt Press F10 to close menu window Press CHome for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 62 GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 13 Press the cursor key followed by the Enter key to select the ADS pull down menu alternatively you may just press the A key OHE EXIT PCOP ADS DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITY lt tm gt 98 ADS TERMSET CREATHLP EXIT Return to LM90 Main Menu XREF TERMF lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press F10 to close menu window Press CHome for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 82 Press the Enter key to pop up the Builder data entry window alternatively you may just press the B key SYSTEM a PATH lt lt Press Home for HELP gt gt lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt gt lt lt Press F10 to close menu window
146. T DER Digital Event Recorder ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 DS EXIT Return to LM90 Main Menu lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 082 In some cases executing a menu option will result in a dialog box being displayed where you must provide additional information to carry out the request For example executing the BUILD menu option on the ADS products menu results in a dialog box being displayed which prompts for a SYSTEM and a PATH A field in a dialog box is always filled out in replace or overstrike mode The Ctrl X key may be used to clear a field completely the lt and cursor keys may be used to position the cursor within the field The J cursor key and Enter key is used to move forward from field to field the T cursor key may be used to move backwards from field to field Pressing the Enter key with the bottommost field selected or pressing the Alt F10 key from any field completes the dialog box SYSTEM M PATH lt lt Press Home for HELP gt gt lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu w
147. TATE Location Z1 Location Z2 0 Scan Rate x Additional Calc Scan Rate Additional Calc DISPLAY FORMAT LISTING Display ormat NORMAL_HIGH Display Format OFF_ON Data Type WORD Data Type STATE Range Action Range Action 0 79 YELLOW OFF NORMAL 80 100 RED ON REVERSE Displayormat STATUS_STRNG Data Type STRING Range Action TABLE HAS FAULT S REVERSE TABLE HAS NEW FAULT REVERSE BLINK NO FAULTS IN TABLE NORMAL TRANSLATION LISTING TranslatioNbEGC_TO_DEGF Variables A 1 800000 Bi 0 C 32 Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL LOOKUP TABLELISTING Lookuplrable OPEN_CLOSED Lookup Table Input Data Type STATE Input Data Type Output Data Type STRING Output Data Type Input Range Output Range Input Range OFF OPEN 1 ON CLOSED 3 0 255 COMMAND SCRIPT LISTING Comman icript LATCHED_CMDS PLCSETW Z1 100 LOGTTM Look at bar chart 6 76 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 STATUS_TEXT BYTE STRING Output Range TABLE HAS FAULT S TABLE HAS NEW FAULT NO FAULTS IN TABLE GFK 0499 6 Section 4 Development Tutorial for Touch Terminals This section is a step by step tutorial for building and executing a system which will use a target terminal with a touch screen interface as opposed to an attached or built in keyboard You should use this section if your target terminal is one of the following GE Fanuc Mini OIT Touch
148. Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp Y Latched N Notify N Auto ack Output text to Following alarm pages Tm Analarm source defines a PLC location which is to be monitored at a user specified rate regardless of the screen or screens currently displayed In this example we are looking at a STATE single bit value located at location Z2 0 Whenever the value is found to be ON set to 1 the text string Unlatched example is to be displayed on alarm page 1 With the Timestamp field set to Y the entry in the alarm page will show the PLC time and date when the alarm condition was seen by the ADC module By leaving the Latched field set to N each time the location is found to transition from OFF to ON a new entry will be logged in the alarm page Thus it is possible that multiple occurrences of the same alarm may appear in the alarm page Such an alarm is said to be unlatched GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 61 Copying an Alarm Source Often many of your alarm sources will be very similar in their definition differing only in PLC location and perhaps in the setting of certain flags In such cases it is easier to start with an existing alarm source and then modify it rather than creating it completely from scratch In our case the remaining two alarm sources will be very similar to alarm source UNLATCHED which we just
149. When you return to the main menu these changes will be reflected on the screen Section 3 File Operations When the File operations option is selected the following screen is displayed Another menu window is opened on the screen giving additional options of Load new database e Directory of systems e Select new folder Rebuild database ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date Print Destination LPT1 System Listing Listing Format 80 colum inline xref 60 lines expanded info Stdtext PID Listing Cross Reference Listing screens 42 alarm pages 9 reports 0 alarm sources 32 data sources 77 Directory of systems display formats 14 Select new folder translation entries 2 Rebuild database eng units conversions 0 lookup table entries 13 command scripts 100 GFK 0499 Chapter 10 The ADS Cross Reference Utility 10 13 Load New Database When the Load new database option is selected a data entry window is opened containing one field ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date LOAD NEW DATABASE Print Destination Listing Format Load database BE screens alarm pages reports alarm sources data sources Directory of systems display formats Select new folder translation entries Rebuild database eng units conversions lookup table entries command
150. Your First Operator Interface System 6 101 In this case we want a bar chart so we select the Bar Chart menu entry A data entry form for the bar chart is opened up on the screen This form is similar to that of a normal dynamic object The bar chart is given the name DEG_C_BAR and is attached to existing data source TEMPERATURE since TEMPERATURE already supplies a Celsius value no additional calculation is required We would like to make our thermometer a little more high tech however Whenever the temperature is in the range of 80 to 100 degrees Celsius we want the bar chart to be displayed differently This is accomplished through the use of a display format With the cursor on the Display Format field press the Alt S key to open up a window of available display formats DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 21D Edit degrees F VALVE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style Display Format Create Format 999 Deg C CG Create Bar C DEG_C_BAR Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc Display Format Direction UP Minimum Value 1 6000 Maximum Value 188 8080 Foreground WHITE Background BLACK 6 102 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Using a Display Format Again no display format is available so you ll need to create one Select the Create Format menu entry this will open up a display format data entry form on
151. a Source PLC_FAULTS Additional Calc Create a data source Name PLC_FAULTS Source Data Type BYTE Source Location PLC_STATUSI 4 PLC_STATUSI 2 Scan Rate RR lt or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Note how data is entered in the Source Location field in the data source data entry form PLC_STATUS is a special PLC status word which is actually a collection of 16 bit STATE flags of status information The left portion of the definition PLC_STATUS 4 indicates that bit b4 the fifth bit of the status word should be accessed Similarly PLC_STATUS 2 indicates that bit b2 the third bit of the status word should be accessed Bit b4 indicates whether there are any faults in the PLC fault table and bit b2 indicates if there has been a change to the PLC fault table since the last time you looked at it Using the semicolon character between the two single bit specifications serves to tie these two locations together to form a new custom value Here a BYTE type has been chosen The leftmost specification PLC_STATUS 4 becomes the least significant bit bit b0 of the byte and the rightmost specification PLC_STATUS 2 becomes bit b1 Bits b2 through b7 are automatically set to 0 to fill out the remainder of the byte GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 55 6 56 Select the Additional Calculation field for data source PLC_FAULTS press the Alt S key to o
152. a blank display on your computer screen Note Your computer may have a CGA EGA or VGA video adapter card even if it uses a monochrome monitor e g the GE Fanuc Workmaster II computer which has a VGA video adapter but a monochrome monitor You should be certain that your computer has an MDA video adapter before changing the video adapter setting By default PCOP assumes you will be communicating with a Series 90 70 ADC module If you communicate with a Series 90 30 ADC module instead PCOP will warn you of this fact each time you enter that software package This warning is harmless and may be ignored However if desired this setting may be changed to avoid receiving the warning If you want to make any changes to the standard computer communications configuration file execute the ADS menu option TERMSET specifying STANDARD OE EXIT BUILD PCOP ADS DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 DS TERMSET STANDARDI USER EXIT Return to LM90 Main Menu lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 82 or type the command ADS_SET at the MS MS DOS prompt and follow the directions given below on how to use TERMSET CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric
153. a printer when running TERMF during system development use ASCII printer table Assume that you want to change the settings for serial port 1 to accommodate a slower printer device Following the guidelines in Chapter 5 enter PCOP either via the Operator Interface Products menu ADS menu option PCOP ADS or by using the ADS command at the MS DOS prompt and proceed to PCOPs main menu screen From the main menu screen you must access the configuration menu by pressing either the F1 key or the Shift F1 keys CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL FOLDER UTILTY Mefltsea basic Becn E Etvorts Bileds Biwid By o EDIT CONFIGURATION DATA Select Default Configuration Edit MegaBasic Configuration Edit CCM Configuration Edit Serial Port Configuration for Ports 1 and 2 Edit Definition Selections for LED s 1 and 2 Edit Hardware Configuration Data Access Advanced Menu Items Suggestion Select default configuration first then make any required changes The configuration must be loaded to the PCM so that a soft reset power cycle or USE command will activate the configuration DNL INE FACTORY C ADS_PC TEST PCM INSERT PCM ID RACK J SLOT A PLC ID yy GFK 0499 D 1 Next press the F10 key to access the Advanced Menu Items Option CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL FOLDER UTILTY SS 2 a a a OR SO oT OOS Edit Programmer Communications and File Server Data Edit Annot
154. able entry in step 14 the additional calculation was applied to the data source rather than to the dynamic object In the previous case the data source was to be used in its raw form with one dynamic object and in a scaled form with a second dynamic object This meant that the scaling had to occur within the specific dynamic object that needed it However in this case data source PLC_FAULTS will only be used as a string so the scaling may be done directly in the data source if desired CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 After completing the data source data entry form you are returned to the dynamic object data entry form Select the Display Format field press the Alt S key to open up the object list window and select Create Format The resulting data entry form should be filled out as shown below OPTIONS MENU Create a display format Name STATUS_STRNG Data Type STRING Range Action TABLE HAS FAULTCS gt REVERSE TABLE HAS NEW FAULT REVERSE BLINK NO FAULTS IN TABLE NORMAL Note that the input range is specified as the converted strings NOT the original BYTE values The display format s data type MUST always match the current data type if an additional calculation has been applied NOT the original input data type of the data source The second action REVERSE BLINK indicates that both video attributes are to be applied After completing the disp
155. able hasn t changed 0 1 1 Has faults Table hasn t changed 1 0 2 No faults Table has changed 1 1 3 Has faults Table has changed OPTIONS MENU Create a lookup table entry Name STATUS_TEXT Input Data Type BYTE Output Data Type STRING INPUT RANGE OUTPUT VALUE TABLE HAS FAULTCS gt TABLE HAS NEW FAULT NO FAULTS IN TABLE In the case of values 1 and 3 there are unique strings we want to display indicating the status of a PLC fault table containing at least one fault However we want to display the same string for values 0 and 2 since in both cases the PLC fault table is empty We could specify the same string twice once for the value 0 and once for 2 but it can be accomplished as shown using only a single string The ADS Executor will always process the lookup table entry from top to bottom looking for a match stopping with the first match it encounters Thus the range notation 0 255 specifies that any byte value other than 1 or 3 should get the indicated output value effectively an otherwise clause Note that unlike what we did previously with the lookup table entry in step 14 the additional calculation was applied to the data source rather than to the dynamic object In the previous case the data source was to be used in its raw form with one dynamic object and in a scaled form with a second dynamic object This meant that the scaling had to occur within the specific dynamic object that needed it
156. alled on the module 3 4 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 If the Restart Reset pushbutton is depressed continuously for 5 seconds or more when the MODULE OK BD OK LED is on the ADC will perform a reset operation and reinitialize to the factory default configuration This reset is referred to as a hard reset A hard reset is used to establish communications with the ADC module and an attached computer A hard reset does not erase the module it only stops the execution of the ADS software In factory mode CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software installation and serial port communications configuration development are performed The CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software may be restarted by a doing a soft reset or cycling power to the rack Table 3 1 Comparison of Hard and Soft Reset Reset Type Hard Soft Press the Restart Reset Pushbutton More than 5 seconds Less than 5 seconds Result Will permit programmer attachment Has CIMPLICITY90 ADSsoftwareinstallation the ability to restart using a soft reset and serial portcommunications configura Utilizesfactory defaultcommunications tionmodification settings CIMPLICITY90 ADS software will be re Normal operating mode startedifinstalled Purpose GFK 0499 Two Serial Communication Ports The Series 90 30 ADC module has a single serial port connector which supports two serial ports This single port conn
157. alog box is automatically closed when you press the Enter key on the last field in the box The ADS Environments When the ADS software is installed onto the ADC module one of two environments is installed development or execute only As their names imply the development environment is used primarily when developing a new ADS operator interface system and the execute only environment is used primarily to execute an existing ADS system automatically when you power up the PLC or soft reset the ADC module In addition the execute only environment is selected when using the PC based Builder to develop an ADS system The ADS Setup Utility allows you to select which major ADS components or options are to be installed onto the ADC module as part of the development or execute only environment As each component and option will occupy memory that would otherwise be available to store the operator interface system that you will create the selections should be made with care If you aren t going to use a particular feature don t include it The ADS Setup Utility does NOT actually install the software on the ADC module it only catalogs your selections The PCOP software is used to install your new selections on the ADC module as explained below and in Chapter 5 Chapter 7 ADS Setup Utility 7 3 Section 4 7 4 Customizing the ADS Development Environment Note Beginning with ADS software release 4 01 the development environment no l
158. ame of VALVE_ANNUN DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F Ta Rae Cannunciator style 999 Deg C ca 18 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page Create Dynamic Object VALVE_ANNUN Data Source Additional Calc Display Format Display Value GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 41 Though in this case we probably remember that the data source we need already exists and is named VALVE let s assume that we can t remember Press the Alt S key to open up the object list noting that VALVE is the fourth data source in the list DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F C32 212 VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F Plc Data Sources 999 Deg C lt 100 F4 PLC_TIME CData Srce F2 edit degrees C TEMPERATURE lt Data Srce VALUE Data Srce Create Dynamic Create Data Source UALUE_ANNUN Data Source Additional Calc Display Format Display Value You can press the 1 key to highlight it and then the Enter key to pick it from the list Since we want to control the video attributes of the text string we need to create a display format to do it Select the Display Format field and then press the Alt S key for the object list Choose to create a new display format filling out the resulting data entry form as shown below SYSTEM SYSTEM DD MMM YY
159. aracters as they would appear on the target terminal There are three disadvantages to using one of the OIT character sets as summarized below 1 When you create screens in the PC based Builder the display will be somewhat compressed into the upper part of the computer s monitor This is because the OITs characters do not use as many pixels in the vertical plane as does your computer s character set As the characters will be somewhat smaller on the monitor they will be somewhat more difficult to see 2 A number of the OIT graphic characters when grouped together form pictures of objects like valves and circles When using one of the OIT character sets in the PC based Builder you may see very thin vertical breaks separating some of the individual characters which affects the display of these pictures This effect is due to your computer s video graphics adapter and will have no affect on what is actually displayed on the target terminal 3 The OIT character set emulation redefines the meaning of the BOLD attribute bit This means that characters viewed in the PC based Builder which were are created with the BOLD attribute enabled will appear on your computer monitor as graphics characters they will appear on the target terminal properly however You can use the ADS Setup utility to switch the character set between invocations of the PC based Builder to reduce the impact of the problems listed above as appropriate to the s
160. as the process of building as described previously Pressing the N key will cause no action to be taken The Database Status field entry on the main screen will be Not Up To Date The third condition is that the database exists and is up to date If this is the case then the following screen will be displayed ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date Print Destination LPT1 System Listing Listing Format 80 colum inline xref 60 lines expanded info Stdtext PID Listing Cross Reference Listing screens 42 alarm pages reports alarm sources Print options data sources File operations display formats Start printout translation entries Exit eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts The current system name and folder will appear at the top of the screen Below that the status of the current database will appear The status of the database can be one of three possibilities Non Existent Not Up To Date or Up To Date Chapter 10 The ADS Cross Reference Utility 10 5 A partial summary of the current print options selected appears in the upper left hand portion of the screen The Print destination can be 1 of 5 options LPT1 COM1 LPT2 COM2 or File The options for the Printer format are either 80 column or 132 column output and 50 to 80 lines The options for the File format are either Stdtext or Postscript A partial summary of
161. ase you may want to set this flag to TM for monochrome B Flag When a system is selected for which the cross reference database does not yet exist a prompt is given to build the database This prompt gives you the option to not build the database If you always want a nonexistent database to be built then this prompt can be eliminated by setting the flag to B N If the prompt is disabled then the building of a nonexistent database WILL BE automatic R Flag When a system is selected for which the cross reference database exists but is not up to date i e changes have been made to the ADS system a prompt is given to rebuild the database This prompt gives you the option to not rebuild the database If you do not want to see this prompt it can be disabled by setting the flag to R N If the prompt is disabled then the rebuilding of a database which is not up to date WILL NOT occur Any one or more of these flags can be specified on the command line at the MS DOS prompt Following is an example of a command line that might be used to invoke the Adsxref Utility ADSXREF XYZ XYZ PCM T M B N R N Once the adsxref utility has been started up one of three scenarios will take place 1 The database for the system selected does not exist 2 The database for the system selected exists but is not up to date 3 The database for the system selected exists and is up to date GFK 0499 Chapter 10 The ADS Cross Reference Utility 10 3 1
162. asking you to select a particular video adapter The video adapter type is Standard Color Graphics Adapter CGA with snow The page length is 25 lines The display of control sequences is disabled The normal display video mode is 3 HEX Do you wish to change the video display setup y Please select the item to be changed 1 change video adapter selection 2 change page length 3 change display control sequences enable 4 change normal display mode 1 Please enter one of the following numbers 1 Enhanced Graphics Adapter Video Graphics Array EGA VGA Standard Color Graphics Adapter CGA with snow Improved CGA with no snow Monochrome Display Adapter MDA Vega 7 Deluxe adapter 7 Multisync Display Enhanced Graphics Adapter Monochrome Display To select the VGA video adapter press the 1 key Note that you are returned to the previous menu and that EGA VQA has been selected as the video adapter The video adapter type is Enhanced Graphics Adapter Video Graphics Array CEGA VGA The page length is 25 lines The display of control sequences is disabled The normal display video mode is 3 HEX The display of long lines is enabled for CRT mode 1 HEX The selected character font is normal ROM Do you wish to change the video display setup CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 Press the N or Enter key to return to the main
163. ation Describing the Configuration Data Read Configuration Data from a File Write Configuration Data to a File Access Standard Menu Items FACTORY C ADS_PC TEST PCM INSERT RACK J SLOT 2 PLC ID Press the F8 key to access the Read Configuration Data From a File screen The ADS configurationfile C PCOP ADS PCM ADS CDFisselectedforreading STASK COMMNT READ WRITE STNDRD M e SS SS Cs E c o o Type name of file from which the configuration data is to be read READ CONFIGURATION FROM A FILE Filename SBS ge0 eS ND Sey lt lt Press Enter Key to Begin Read Operation gt gt NOTE A filename extension of CDF will be added if one is not provided except for UCDF and RAM UCDF INSERT PCM ID RACK J SLOT 9 PLC ID Ql C ADS_PCN TEST PCM D 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 2 Pressing the Enter key causes the specified configuration file to be read into PCOPs work space STASK COMMNT READ WRITE STNDRD 2 SS OO Command Complete READ CONFIGURATION FROM A FILE F i Lemame lt lt Press Enter Key to Begin Read Operation gt gt NOTE A filename extension of CDF will be added if one is not provided except for UCDF and RAM UCDF ONL INE FACTORY C NADS_PCNTEST PCM ODIF IED INSERT PCM ID RACK J SLOT A PLC ID QYJ To edit the settings for port 1 first press the Shift F10 keys to ret
164. bably want to display the temperature with NORMAL video attributes for 0 to 79 and with the BOLD video attribute for 80 to 100 In the case of a color terminal you might want to select a color such as YELLOW for 0 to 79 and RED for 80 to 100 DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F Create a display format Name NORMAL_HIGH Data Type WORD Range Action 6 79 yellou 80 168 red Completing the display format data entry form will return you to the bar chart data entry form Note that rather than pressing the Enter key a number of times to complete the form you can just press the Alt F10 key which will immediately complete and save the form GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 37 The remainder of the bar chart data entry form is correct except that the minimum value needs to be changed to 0 On color terminals the foreground and background color specifications give you the ability to affect the foreground and background colors of the bar chart differently than those of the screen it appears on DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C C 1800 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page Create Bar Chart DEG _C_BAR Black Source TEMPERATURE Red al Calc Green Format NORMAL_HIGH
165. be concerned about organizing the information on the various screens so that you can properly position the needed touch points In particular on screens that will require the input of numeric data you will need to organize your data so that you will have screen space to pop up a numeric keypad without covering up the field you are trying to enter data into What To Do Before Creating Your First Screen GFK 0499 When you enter the Builder specifying the name of a new system the Builder will generate a new initialized system You will need to tell the Builder several things about the system you intend to create before you actually start building it The example screen below shows how the Builder initializes certain settings when generating a new system In the upper third of the screen you will see the settings initially applied for the terminal ADC communications port and printer port At least the terminal will always have to be changed to specify the intended target terminal that will be connected to the ADC module the other two will also sometimes need to be changed Chapter 8 ADS Off Line PC BasedBuilder 8 5 8 6 ADS BUILDER Current System Name NEW Terminal MPC CCON2 gt Printer CNULL gt Dir ADS_PC NEW PCM Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Default Scan Rate 1 68 s
166. ched N Notify N Auto ack N Output text to Following alarm pages 71 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Name this new alarm source AUTO_ACK For the purposes of this tutorial we will leave the PLC location specified the same as for the UNLATCHEDalarm Typically you will always need to change the PLC Location field following an alarm source copy The Text field is changed to read Auto ack example and the Auto ack flag is changed to Y By default an entry in an alarm page will be shown blinking when it occurs When an operator acknowledges the alarm it will be shown steady In addition if the alarm source is no longer in alarm the entry will be removed from the alarm page following its acknowledgment You should set the Auto ack flag to Y for any alarms you do not want an operator to have to explicitly acknowledge ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name AUTO_ACK Source Data Type STATE PLC Location Z2 Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC gt Additional Calc Range ON Action Text Auto ack example Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp Y Latched N Notify N Auto ack B Output text to Following alarm pages 71 Make another copy of alarm source UNLATCHED this time giving it a name of LATCHED Select the first Action field and press the Alt S key to open up the object list fo
167. compatible personal computer with either a monochrome or color display use the following steps Note that the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software refers to a color IBM PC compatible computer as CIBM and a monochrome one as MIBM In the ADS SETUP UTILITY see Chapter 5 and 7 you will need to set up the host computer as either color or monochrome and the target terminal as COM1 Refer to your computer s reference manuals for detailed information on your computer For detailed information on using TERMF and TERMSET refer to GFK 0255 which is the Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module User s Manual Note that TERMF is a terminal fileserver program which will be copied to your hard disk during the installation process in Chapter 5 TERMF allows your computer to function both as a terminal and as a hard disk for the ADC module Note The following steps should be used as a quick reference and for CIMPLICITY 90 ADS only These steps should not be performed without first reviewing the applicable chapters of your IBM compatible computer s Reference manual All the setup needed will be performed by following the sequence of instructions given in Chapter 5 The computer should be attached to Port 1 on the ADC module refer to page 5 14 for selecting the proper cable Note that there are two different BAT files which will be copied to your hard disk during the installation process in Chapter 5 which are useful for using your computer as a terminal AD
168. conversions lookup table entries command scripts 42 9 0 32 7 14 2 0 13 100 Interactive search Print options File operations Start printout Exit CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Chapter The Operator Interface Products Menu 11 The Operator Interface Products Menu provides easy menu driven access to a variety of operator interface tools and utilities Pressing the OI soft key on the Logicmaster 90 programming software main menu or alternatively by typing OI_MENU at the MS DOS prompt gains you access to the OI menu EXIT DER Digital Event Recorder ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 DS EXIT Return to LM90 Main Menu lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 62 Arranged horizontally at the top of the screen is a series of pull down product menus plus an EXIT from the menu When the menu is first entered the leftmost product menu is initially highlighted The lt and gt cursor keys are used to highlight or select a particular menu For example pressing the cursor key would select the ADS products menu GFK 0499 11 1 DSH EXIT DER Digital Event Recorder ADS CIMPLICITYCtm
169. creens of your system you are working on in the PC based Builder at any point in time By default the printer attached to your computer is treated as a generic ASCII printer All output to such a printer is done with standard ASCII characters Any line drawing or other graphic characters are printed out with a standard ASCII character representing it If you are using one of the terminal tables COIT MOIT MINI TMINI TCOIT or TMOIT and you are using the graphic character capabilities of that terminal the Epson and HP HPGL Laser choices are attractive alternatives The Epson selection supports any of the standard Epson compatible printers e g Epson FX 100 and the HP selection supports any of the HP compatible laser printers which supports HPGL e g HP LaserJet ISi With the Epson and HP type of printers you can obtain a true printout of your screens which contain graphic characters on them CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 7 Specifying the Target Terminal The target terminal selection tells ADS where it should expect to find your target display terminal and lets you select which terminal types are to be supported Your target terminal s location will depend on the type of terminal you are using and will be either COM1 or COM2 The current selections may be viewed in the middle third of the ADS Setup Utility page 2 screen Refer to the table below to determine the selection w
170. ction of the ADC If the Restart Reset pushbutton is depressed for less than 5 seconds when the MODULE OK BD OK LED is on the ADC will restart the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software if it has been installed on the module This reset is referred to as a soft reset A power cycle will also cause the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software to restart if it has been installed on the module If the Restart Reset pushbutton is depressed continuously for 5 seconds or more when the MODULE OK BD OK LED is on the ADC will perform a reset operation and reinitialize to the factory default configuration This reset is referred to as a hard reset The hard reset is used to establish communications with the ADC module and an attached computer A hard reset does not erase the module it only stops the execution of the ADS software Table 2 1 Comparison of Hard and Soft Reset Reset Press the Result Purpose Type Restart Reset Pushbutton Hard More than5 seconds Will permit programmer attachment Has the CIMPLICITY90 A DSsoftware ability to restart using a soft reset Utilizes installation and serial port factory default communicationssettings communicationsonfiguration modification Soft Less than 5 seconds CIMPLICITY90 ADS software will be restarted if Normal operating mode installed Two Serial Communication Ports The two connectors on the ADC module provide access to the serial ports which are used to communicate with external
171. d The second number is the total number of files to be processed The length of time required to process a file depends on the amount of information in the file that can be cross referenced The cfg file is the first file that is processed Generally the cfg file of a relatively large ADS system takes the longest time to process A screen which contains a large number of dynamic objects will take longer to process than a screen file that contains only a few dynamic objects CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 The second condition is that the database for the system selected exists but is not up to date i e changes have been made to the ADS system since the database was constructed If the rebuild prompt has not been disabled the following screen will be displayed ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm WARNING changes may have been made to the system Print Dest i BRAG y Ry one Rey ae os we Colon a ott Mod Nt Da Listing For RTE ae tome oe OC ea ome Cue Lit C4 D Cross Reference Listing screens alarm pages reports alarm sources Print options data sources File operations display formats Start printout translation entries Exit eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts Pressing the Y key will cause the process of rebuilding the database to begin The process of rebuilding is the same
172. d temperature of 75 F changes to read 73 7 Apr 88 18 06 36 73 Deg F C32 212 Edit degrees F VALUE IS 0PEN Cstatus style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE 23 Deg C CO 100 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS 6 146 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 SCREEN DETAILS LISTING ScreenNumber 1 MAIN Start Row 1 Start Column 1 End Row Image NORMAL Background BLACK Foreground Dynamic Object DATE_DISPLAY Start Row 4 Start Column End Row 4 61 End Column Data Source PLC_DATE Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Yes Avail for Edit No Dynamic Object DEG_C_VALUE Start Row 13 Start Column 3 End Row Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Yes Avail for Edit Yes Min 0 Max 100 Dynamic Object TIME_DISPLAY Start Row 4 End Row Start Column 72 End Column Data Source PLC_TIME Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Yes Avail for Edit No Dynami bjectVALVE_STATUS Start Row 6 Start Column 51 Data Source VALVE AdditionalCalc OPEN_CLOSED Display Format Display Value Yes Avail for Edit No GFK 0499 End Column 13 End Column Left_justify 4 End Row 6 End Column Left_justify Chapter 6 Development T
173. data entry form GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 133 6 134 Creating an Alarm Page Use the Esc key to return to the Builder s main menu and from there select the Alarm Operations menu Execute the New Alarm Page option and fill out the alarm page s data entry form as shown in the following screen ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate B8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58 8 Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN i him alarm page Create an alarm page Name ULU_ALRM Number 1 Starting Row 5 Rous 10 Starting Column 9 Columns 39 Foreground WHITE Background BLACK Heading AUR ET aS Analarm page is a special type of screen that is used to display alarm information and optionally allow the operator to interact with it to view and acknowledge particular alarms It has no key assignments of its own function key assignments providing for manipulation of the alarm page must be provided by the topmost screen on the display The actual alarms themselves are not specified here they will be created next Completing the alarm page data entry form will return you to the Alarm Operations menu CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Creating an Alarm Source Select the Alarm Sources menu
174. der Configuration Operations to the terminal table used for your particular target terminal 6 Create the screens alarms etc that you want to see executed on the target terminal Remember to go back to the Modify System Parameters data entry form and specify the starting screen number if you have not already done so 7 Save your system additions and changes to your computer s hard disk by using the Save system to disk option under Load Save Operations Chapter 8 ADS Off Line PC BasedBuilder 8 7 8 Update your system database files on the ADC module s RAM drive by using the Refresh system in RAM option under Load Save Operations Note that the first time this option is executed after entering the Builder that the complete system will be loaded to the ADC module even if it already exists on the RAM drive This is because the Builder has no way to compare the files on the ADC module with those on the computer to see which ones actually need updating Subsequent system refreshes will load only those files that have changed to the ADC module s RAM drive 9 Execute your system by using the Execute system in RAM option under Load Save Operations You should see your system begin executing on the target terminal If instead you receive the error message Function not available when ADC is Offline Attach or reset ADC you should make sure that your computer is connected to port 1 of the A
175. devices Both of the ports can be used for either RS 232 or RS 485 modes of operation Refer to Appendix B for detailed serial port information and pin assignments Install the battery on the ADC module Power down the Series 90 70 PLC system Locate the desired rack and slot in which you wish to install the ADC module and follow the module installation information below Important ADC Installation Information In a Series 90 70 PLC single rack system the ADC resides in the same rack as the CPU In a multiple rack system the ADC can reside in either the Series 90 70 CPU rack or in an I Oexpansion rack GFK 0499 Chapter 2 Getting Started Series 90 70 PLC Users 2 5 The following illustration shows one possible system configuration for installing a Series 90 70 ADC in a main or expansion rack LOCAL RACK CONFIGURATION a44533 P C A S P D 2 UJC CPU RACK EXPANSION RACK P C B P BJA S P T S R D i U M M C ier Figure 2 2 Examples of Series 90 70 ADC Module Location in a Rack The Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module may be placed in any slot not already allocated in any rack with the following cautions e The maximum number of ADC modules per Series 90 70 PLC system is 63 When ADCs are installed in a Series 90 70 rack all the slots bet
176. different than the one shown above as determined by the firmware revision of your MINI OIT The Key Codes setting should be set to FIVE for the Mini Touch OIT and to ONE for the non touch version Press the F7 or the Home key to exit the Configuration Menu screen and put the MINI OIT Online Connect the OIT to the ADC module Use the IC690CBL705 cable supplied with your CIMPLICITY 90 ADS package Connect the female end of the cable to the port labeled PRIMARY DTE on the back of the OIT then connect the other end of the cable to PORT 2 bottom connector on the ADC module If you are using the IC690CBL705 cable to connect your IBM PS 2 or GE Fanuc Workmaster II computer you must order another of the same cable to connect to your OIT or make your own cable If you are making your own cable the applicable wiring diagrams are provided in Appendix B This completes the installation of your Mini OIT terminal Go on to Chapter 5 which tells you how to copy the ADS software onto your computer and install it on your ADC modules CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 3 Using a VT100 Standard Terminal GFK 0499 If the terminal you have selected is a VT100 or compatible terminal use the following steps Note that the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software refers to this terminal as VT100 The following steps should be used as a quick reference and for CIMPLICITY 90 ADS use only These steps should
177. dule m oe a E Pressing the Return to the main screen touch area returns you to the main screen 7 Apr 88 18 04 54 32 Deg F C32 212 Edit degrees F VALUE IS 0PEN Cstatus style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE Deg C CO 100 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 145 Beware of Rounding Errors When you are using scaling with a dynamic object which you then edit the scaling is applied in reverse so that the value is sent to the PLC with the proper units This conversion can lead to rounding errors which can result in a display being slightly different than what you expected For example our temperature value was defined to be in units of degrees Celsius In one case we display the equivalent temperature value in degrees Fahrenheit and also allow you to edit that value Assume that the operator edits the degrees Fahrenheit temperature entering a value of 75 EM Deg F C32 212 Edit degrees F B Deg C CB 1800 UIEN Edit degrees C ALARM PAGE Zee zi After pressing the ENTER touch area the value is converted to degrees Celsius before being stored in the defined memory area Following that the screen values are again scanned and the screen refreshed with the new values Since some roundoff error occurred in the conversion the just entere
178. e ADC module must be hard reset for this function to execute The Builder will automatically check the ADCs status before attempting to copy the files Should you see a message indicating that communications with the ADC module could not be established you should check to make sure that A the appropriate cable from your computer is connected to your ADC module and that B the module is hard reset As each file is copied to the ADC module a message is displayed on the message line indicating that fact At the completion of the copy a Refresh Complete message will be displayed ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate B8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Load system Save system to disk Modify current directory Execute system in RAM Clear system Print destination OQrPOrPFNDMROAOAN Loading File TUTOR ALM 6 122 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Executing the System Now let s execute our system Select the Execute system in RAM menu option ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate B
179. e before proceeding any further Section 1 GE Fanuc Monochrome OIT IC600KD510 or IC600KD513 or IC600KD530 or IC600KD533 GE Fanuc Color OIT IC600KD512 or IC600KD514 or IC600KD532 or IC600KD534 Nematron 12 color OptiTOUCH terminal IWS 1511T or IWS 1513T and 12 monochrome OptiTOUCH terminals IWS 1011T or IWS 1013T Section 2 GE Fanuc Mini OIT IC600KD515 GE Fanuc Mini Touch OIT IC600KD516 Section 3 VT100 or compatible Section 4 Monochrome IBM or compatible personal computer running TERMF Color IBM or compatible personal computer running TERMF Section 5 Lucas Deeco ST 2200 GFK 0499 4 1 Section 1 Using a GE Fanuc Monochrome or Color OIT If the terminal you have selected is a GE Fanuc monochrome or color OIT or a Nematron OptiTOUCH color or Opti TOUCH monochrome use the following steps Note that the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software refers to the GE Fanuc monochrome OIT as MOIT the GE Fanuc color OIT as COIT the Nematron OptiTOUCH color terminal as TCOIT and the Nematron Opti TOUCH monochrome terminal as TMOIT Note The following steps should be used as a quick reference for CIMPLICITY 90 ADS use only These steps should not be performed without first reviewing Chapters 1 2 and 3 of your Operator Interface Terminal User s Manual GFK 0505 for IC600KD53X terminals or GEK 90817 for IC600KD51X terminals or the applicable Nematron color touch or monochrome touch terminal manual Make sure that the OIT power i
180. e bottom line of the screen is reserved as the status area for the screen painter It indicates the name of the system the screen being painted the lt row column gt screen position of the cursor that the painter is in text mode and that you are currently able to create static text Initially we want to create a double size text header for the screen Use the cursor keys to position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 2 1 gt Then press the Alt D key to put the line into double size mode this will be denoted by the appearance of a reverse video D in the status area Now use the cursor keys to position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 2 5 gt Then press the F1 key to select the video attributes menu Reverse Blink Underscore Text Static GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 21 Select the choice of Reverse The video attribute menu will be closed automatically the activation of reverse video will be denoted by the Re designator in the right side of the status area Now type in the desired text TUTOR AN ADS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM The double size text is displayed on your computer screen as two identical double spaced lines these will appear as a single double size line on your terminal when the system is executed Row Col Text Static Since we have now entered all the text we want to with the reverse video attribute p
181. e cursor key mode keybindings display change palette settings EXIT TERMSET save file including any changes and exit quit discard any changes Your selection please To change your computer s communications port setting to COM2 press the 1 key to enter the display change comm port settings menu The setup for the serial port is data rate 19200 flow ctrl HARDWARE parity NONE stop bits 1 bits char 8 comm port COM1 data mask FF Hex PCOP dflt PCM 90 70 Please enter one of the following numbers change data rate change flow control technique change parity change stop bits change bits per character change communications port change received character mask change default PCOP PCM connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 t exit to previous menu Your selection please D 8 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 2 Press the 6 key to access the communications port selection data entry screen Please enter one of the following numbers 1 COM1 is communications port 2 COM2 is communications port E exit to previous menu selection please Press the 2 key to select COM2 as the communications port Note that you are automatically returned to the previous menu screen and that COM2 is now shown as the selected communications port The setup for the serial port is data rate 19200 flow ctrl HARDWARE parit
182. e settings display change normal keybindings display change application mode keybindings display change cursor key mode keybindings display change palette settings EXIT TERMSET save file including any changes and exit quit discard any changes Your selection please D 10 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 2 To change the video adapter selection to VGA first press the 2 key to access the display change video adapter settings menu The video adapter type is Standard Color Graphics Adapter CGA with snow The page length is 25 lines The display of control sequences is disabled The normal display video mode is 3 HEX Do you wish to change the video display setup Press the Y key to confirm that you want to change the video display setup An additional menu selection is displayed The video adapter type is Standard Color Graphics Adapter CGA with snow The page length is 25 lines The display of control sequences is disabled The normal display video mode is 3 HEX Do you wish to change the video display setup y Please select the item to be changed change video adapter selection change page length change display control sequences enable change normal display mode GFK 0499 Appendix D Changing Default Port Settings D 11 D 12 Press the 1 key to change the video adapter selection You are prompted with an additional menu
183. e techniques learned in steps 6 and 7 place reverse video boxes around the View text and reverse video the Return to the main screen and the Exit the system and hard reset the ADC module text 4 OPTIONS MENU View the PLC Fault Table the I O Fault Table RXXAAKK AXXRARKA FARR H XXXKAKK RARAARK AKRR Return to the main screen Exit the system and hard reset the ADC module 188 Row amp Col amp Text Static Press the Delete key to toggle off the touch point grid as all the needed text has been properly positioned on the screen Using the techniques learned beginning with step 8 regarding the creation of dynamic objects position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 4 12 gt and create a dynamic object spanning the sequence of 19 X s The data entry form should be filled out as indicated below OPTIONS MENU the PLC Fault Table the I O Fault Table KXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXI XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Return to the main screen Create Dynamic Object Name PLC_FLT_STAT Data Source PLC_FAULTS Additional Calc Create a data source Name PLC_FAULTS Source Data Type BYTE Source Location PLC_STATUSL 4 PLC_STATUSL 2 Scan Rate RM lt or HH MM SS CC Additional Calc Note the syntax of the Source Location field in the data source data entry form PLC_STATUS is a special PLC
184. e we probably won t have a keyboard attached to the target touch terminal we ll need to create a screen to provide the numeric keypad functionality First press the Alt F10 key to save the main screen you ll be returned to the screen operations menu ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal Printer Dir TMINI cCOM2 gt CNULL gt ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Default Scan Rate 1 Default Alarm Scan Rate a Startup Screen 08 s 58 s Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN MAIN DX Neu screen Modify screen Delete screen Copy screen Key assignments List screens Print screen details Touch screen assignments We now need to create a new screen to serve as the numeric keypad This screen will need to provide access to at least 15 unique functions 0 9 decimal point minus clear cancel and enter so a minimum of 15 touch points will be required Since many people are familiar with a computer keyboard s numeric keypad we will design our screen with that look and feel Also since the values we need to edit are on the left hand side of the main screen we ll want our numeric keypad to appear on the right hand side of the screen The Create Screen dialog box should be filled out as shown below any unused screen number could have been specified ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI CCOM2 gt Printer CNULL gt Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Screens Default Sca
185. eating Your First Operator Interface System 6 5 Press the 1 key to select the System Name field and type in the text RAM TUTOR Then press the key again to select the Terminal Table field and type in the appropriate terminal table as determined from table 5 3 For this tutorial the Printer Table field will not need to be filled out CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL FOLDER UTILTY save PZload Be Edi BO Grdel Bclear ads Mods Enter a Terminal Table File Name CIMPLICITY TM 39A ADS ADS Environment AAAA CDEVELOPMENT or EXECUTE ONLY System Name EWR Terminal Table Printer Table Listing of Files in ADS Folder CPC PCOPNADS PCM ADS_MENU ENU ADSDEU DAT ADSSETUP 301 ADSE ENU ADSDM ENU PCMEXEC BAT ADSEXE DAT OIT TBL ADSB EXE ADSDM EXE ADSE EXE ADSPRNT EXE ADS_MENU ADS_RUN MENU EXE SPOOL EXE STARTUP EXE ADSBM HLP README 201 ADS CDF ADSFLT EXE ADSPID EXE MIBM TEL MINI TBL TCOIT TEL Total Bytes Available 57700352 Folder Size 983324 Bytes lt lt Press Enter Key to Begin ADS Installation gt gt lt EXECUTE ONLY fields default to RAM EMPTY OIT TBL ASCII TBL respectively gt lt lt Press PgUp or PgDn Key to Scroll Listing of Files gt gt ONLINE FACTORY D NADS_PCNTUTOR PCM INSERT PCM ID RACK SLOT PLC ID Gi Press the Enter key to begin the ADS software installation process You will be prompted to confirm the operation CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL
186. ect the Screen Operations submenu either by pressing the or cursor keys to select its menu entry and then pressing the Enter key to select it or alternately by just pressing the S key Throughout the remainder of this tutorial when you are asked to select a menu item you should either cursor to that item and then press the enter key or alternatively you may just press the letter corresponding to the first letter of the menu item Where more that one menu item begins with the same first character the topmost item in the menu list would be selected by pressing its corresponding first letter ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal COIT lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate 1 Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate B Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN BG s 58 s ns Rew seren Modify screen Screen paint Delete screen Copy screen Key assignments List screens Print screen details CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Select the New Screen menu item to open up the create screen data entry form ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal COIT CCOM2 gt Default Scan Rate 1 Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate a Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN BG s 58 s Create Screen Screen Name Screen Number Sta
187. ector is divided into two serial ports using the WYE cable labeled PCM COMM CABLE IC693CBL305A which is included in your CIMPLICITY 90 ADS package see figure 3 2 The two serial ports are used to communicate with external devices Both of the ports can be used for either RS 232 or RS 485 modes of operation Refer to Appendix B for detailed port information and pin assignments 1 FOOT ___ 2 0 INCH 0 INCH RS 232 a44225 25 PIN FEMALE CONNECTOR PIN 1 x ae LABEL Ne PCM COMM CABLE Q IC693CBL305B PORT1 PORT2 U PIN 1 RS 232 25 PIN MALE CONNECTOR Figure 3 2 Series 90 30 Wye Cable Chapter 3 Getting Started Series 90 30 PLC Users RS 232 RS 485 PIN 1 25 PIN FEMALE CONNECTOR 3 5 Install the battery on the ADC module STEP 3 Use Logicmaster 90 software or the Hand Held Programmer to stop the PLC STEP 4 Power down the Series 90 30 PLC system STEP 5 Locate the desired baseplate and slot in which you want to install the ADC module and follow the module installation information below The Series 90 30 ADC module can only be used in a Model 331 or Model 341 PLC system and must be installed in the main baseplate with the CPU It cannot be installed in an expansion baseplate STEP 6 Install the Series 90 30 ADC module using the follo
188. ed statement after first PCOP beginning with either via the Page D 6 in fourth paragraph after the word file added text beginning with execute the and a new screen example In last sentence in last paragraph after the word file added text beginning with execute the and screen example CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Preface e Page D 8 deleted At the DOS and the following command replaced with Access TERMSET as indicated above GFK 0499 Preface v Preface Content of this Manual vi This manual contains the following information Chapter 1 Introduction to CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Provides an overview of features of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Chapter 2 Getting Started Series 90 70 PLC Users Describes how to install the ADC module in a Series 90 70 rack and configure it in Logicmaster 90 70 configuration software Chapter 3 Getting Started Series 90 30 PLC Users Describes how to install the ADC module in a Series 90 30 baseplate and configure it in Logicmaster 90 30 configuration software Chapter 4 Setting Up and Connecting the Display Terminal Describes the display terminals that can be used with your CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Operator Interface System and how to connect them to your CIMPLICITY 90 ADS system Chapter 5 Installing the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software Describes how to install CIMPLICITY 90 ADS
189. eed to make to the standard default communications file concerning the COM port of your computer the video adapter of your computer and the type of ADC module you are using By default the following configuration settings will be in effect for your computer 1 COMI of your computer is communications port to ADC port 1 2 video adapter is CGA with snow setting works for all but MDA adapters 3 will communicate to a Series 90 70 ADC module Possible reasons for changing these three settings are given below along with directions for how to change them Appendix D Changing Default Port Settings D 5 D 6 Typically you will want to use your computer s COM1 port as the communications port However if your computer supports a second serial port COM2 it may be used instead if desired Most computers available today have either a CGA with or without snow EGA or VGA video adapter card installed in them The default setting for PCOP CGA with snow functions as a lowest common denominator and will work for any of the designated video cards You might still want to change this item if you have a different adapter for slightly better screen response when using your computer as a terminal CIBM or MIBM terminal tables If your computer has a monochrome video adapter MDA card you MUST change this item Executing PCOP or TERMF on a computer with an MDA video adapter card with the video adapter selected as any other type will lead to
190. elect screen 1 the main screen Enter the key assignments shown below ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Screen key assignments for MAIN lt 1 PSHSCNC900 gt DYN_EDITC1 DEG_F_ VALUE REVERSE POPSCNC 900 PSHSCNC98 gt DYN_EDITC1 DEG_C_VALUE REVERSE POPSCNC94 PLCSETBCZ2 G1 0 gt PLCSETBCZ2 1 gt EXITO L Function key one is set up to begin a field edit of dynamic object DEG_F_VALUE on screen 1 First the numeric keypad screen 900 must be displayed on the screen This is accomplished via the PSHSCN 900 command where the number of the screen to push is place in parentheses A screen which is pushed onto the display overlays as opposed to replaces the current screen s on the display DYN_EDIT is the command for beginning a field edit You must enter a screen number along with the dynamic object s name since dynamic object names need be unique only within a single screen not among different screens The third item or parameter in the command list is REVERSE This item indicates the video attribute which should be applied to the field while the edit is active Upon successfully completing the edit by pressing the ENTER button the numeric keypad screen will automatically be removed from the display via the POPSCN command Function key two is another field edit command this time for dynamic object DEG_C_VALUE on screen 1 Function key four is used to open
191. ep in the installation procedure is to physically install the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module in a Series 90 70 PLC rack and verify that it is working properly CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 1 Installing the Series 90 70 ADC Module GFK 0499 The following steps should be followed for installation of the ADC module in your Series 90 70 PLC Remove the ADC module from its box Next refer to Figure 2 1 and become familiar with the location of the items on the module which are described following the figure BD OK DOOR r4 USER 1 P1 OK USER 2 O P2 OK RESTART O BATTERY lt i CONNECT PORT 1 PORT 2 MODEL 70 ADC 701 X MODULE OK XX PORT 1 ACTIVE X PORT 2 ACTIVE ON OK ACTIVE o PUSH TO RESTART APPLICATION PUSH AND HOLD TO STOP AND RESET l BATTERY e CONNECTIONS INSTALL NEW BATTERY BEFORE UNPLUGGING OLD BATTERY USE 1 697ACC701 LQ z PORT 1 RS 232 OR z RS 422 485 ii PRINTER O PcoP MODULE FUNCTION SERIES 90 70 ALPHANUMERIC DI COPROCESSOR o i PORT 2 3 RS 232 33 RS 422 485 1t TERMINAL J MODULE IC697ADC701 a44534 LABEL
192. er data entry window alternatively you may just press the B key SYSTEM a PATH lt lt Press Home for HELP gt gt lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt gt lt lt Press F10 to close menu window Press CHome for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 82 6 78 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Fill out the System name field with the text TUTOR SYSTEM jy PATH lt lt Press Home for HELP gt gt lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press F10 to close menu window Press CHome for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 82 Press the Enter key twice to access the Builder s copyright screen alternatively you can press the Alt F10 key Pressing the Enter key while viewing the copyright screen will display the Builder s main menu screen ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal MPC CCOM2 gt Default Scan Rate Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats
193. erminal The bottom line of the screen is reserved as the status area for the screen painter It indicates the name of the system the screen being painted the lt row column gt screen position of the cursor that the painter is in text mode and that you are currently able to create static text Initially we want to create a double size text header for the screen Use the cursor keys to position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 2 1 gt Then press the Alt D key to put the line into double size mode this will be indicated by the appearance of a reverse video D in the status area Now use the cursor keys to position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 2 5 gt Then press the F1 key to select the video attributes menu Underscore TUTOR 1 Rou A Col Text Static CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Select the choice of Reverse The video attribute menu will be closed automatically the activation of reverse video will be indicated in the status area by the Re designator Now type in the desired text TUTOR AN ADS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM The double size text is displayed on your computer screen as two identical double spaced lines these will appear as a single double size line on your terminal when the system is executed TUTOR 1 Row Col Text Static Since we have now entered all the text that we want to with the reverse video
194. es Avail for Edit No Dynami ObjectVALVE_STATUS Start Row 6 End Row 6 Start Column 51 End Column 58 Data Source VALVE AdditionalCalc OPEN_CLOSED Display Format Display Value Yes Avail for Edit No Left_justify Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System Additional Calc Display Format NORMAL_HIGH Display Value No Avail for Edit No Dynamic Object DEG_F_VALUE End Row 6 End Column 4 Start Row 6 Start Column 2 Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc DEGC_TO_DEGF Display Format Display Value Yes Avail for Edit Yes Min 32 Max 212 Left_justify Dynamic Object VALVE_ANNUN Start Row 8 End Row 8 Start Column 42 End Column 58 Data Source VALVE Additional Calc Display Format OFF_ON Display Value No Avail for Edit No 6 73 Sanda eek PSUS E A E Eee dais Preah eo onde ied Seated AE boats Bee SS dere Ser sarees he a tare tet ee TUTOR AN ADS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM TUTOR AN ADS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM 100 DD MMM YY HH MM SS 4 999 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fl edit degrees F D E B VALVE IS CLOSED annunciator style G A ats 999 Deg C 0 100 R F4 Open valve F5 Close valve 10 F2 edit degreesC C he SSS E E E ee F7 View Alarm Page F8 Close Alarm Page O
195. except the file PID PID and end with one of the following extensions CFG ALM SCN REP HEL HLP PID or STR By keeping only a single system in a folder you will be able to take advantage of PCOPs folder load capability when you need to load your system to the ADCs RAM disk You are also strongly encouraged to make periodic backups of your folder to guard against the accidental loss of system data The general rule of thumb is to back up your folder after you have made significant changes to the system or perhaps once or twice a day The PCOP software provides a folder backup function within its Folder menu of functions which you may use to easily perform your backup operation It also provides a folder restore function in case you find the need to go back to a previously saved version of your system Although you may execute the PC based Builder and PCOP from any current MS DOS directory you may find it more convenient to use the MS DOS CD change directory command to select the folder containing your system as the current directory This has greatest benefit when using PCOP since when PCOP is executed it looks to see if the current MS DOS directory is a folder and if so automatically selects it and bypasses the initial select a folder screen CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 3 Building Your System Before You Start Although ADS requires no programm
196. ey A copy of dynamic object DEG_C_VATUE is placed on the screen with its data entry form automatically opened up All data on the form is identical to that for DEG_C_VALUE except that the name field is blank remember that dynamic object names must be unique on a given screen DD MMM YY HH MM SS REE Deg F C32 21D Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C CG Copy Dynamic Object Nane Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Y CY N Hex Notation Min 8 Left Justify Max 160 zero Fill Available for Edit Immediate write CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Using a Linear Translation The dynamic object is given the name DEG_F_VALUE The data source TEMPERATURE is already the correct one so it is left as specified However TEMPERATURE yields a Celsius value not the desired Fahrenheit value Given a Celsius value it may be converted to Fahrenheit by the equation F 1 8 x C 32 Thus we need to apply an Additional Calculation to the value supplied by data source TEMPERATURE With the Additional Calculation field selected press the Alt S key to open up a window of available additional calculations DD MMM YY HH MM SS EEE Deg F 32 21 VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style Additional Calculation Create Lookup
197. f your systems when executing the PC based Builder by specifying ADSBUILD lt system name gt root ADS PC drawer ADS_PC lt Sys _1 gt PCM ADS_PC lt SyS_ 2 gt PCM ADS_PC lt SyS_n gt PCM folder folder C folder Alternatively the PC based Builder will let you manage the creation and placement of the folder which will contain your system In this case you execute the Builder with the command ADSBUILD lt system name gt lt source folder gt where lt source folder gt is the full path designation for where the folder is to be found the system name need not match the folder name For example to create the system LINEinthefolder FOLDERS ACME PCM you would execute the Builder with the command ADSBUILDLINE FOLDERS ACME PCM Chapter 8 ADS Off Line PC BasedBuilder 8 3 As a word of caution if you specify the folder destination when creating your system you will always need to specify it If at some later time you specify only ADSBUILD LINE when executing the Builder a new system named LINE will be created in the folder ADS_PC LINE PCM Whether you allow the PC based Builder to manage the naming and placement of your folder or you do it yourself you are strongly encouraged to keep only a single system in your folder and to make sure that other non system files are not created in the folder All of the files making up your system will begin with the name of your system
198. face Products Menu EDS EXIT BUILD PCOP ADS DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 DS TERMSET CREATHLP EXIT Return to LM98 Main Menu TERMF lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 062 Upon executing the XREF menu item you will be prompted for the name of the system and the path where it will be found By default this data entry form will be filled out with the system and path that you last used with one of the ADS menu items GFK 0499 10 1 USM EXIT BUILD PCOP ADS DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 DS TERMSET CREATHLP EXIT Return to LM90 Main Menu SYSTEM PATH lt lt Press Home for HELP gt gt lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 082 To access the Adsxref Utility from the MS DOS prompt type the following command ADSXREF lt system_name gt lt system_path gt where lt system_name gt is a name of an existing ADS system lt sy
199. file can not be stored to the PLC A CONFIG INVALID status is most likely to occur where Aslotin the PLC rack is vacant between the CPU and ADC module For more details regarding CONFIG INVALID refer to your Logicmaster 90 70 Programming Software User s manual GFK 0263 Go to the Logicmaster 90 70 Utilities Menu and STORE your configuration to the PLC You have now completed configuring your Series 90 70 ADC module s in Logicmaster 90 Go on to Chapter 4 which tells you how to set up and connect your display terminal Chapter 2 Getting Started Series 90 70 PLC Users 2 9 Chapter Getting Started Series 90 30 PLC Users GFK 0499 3 This chapter explains how to install and set up your CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Display system on your Series 90 30 PLC system The chapter is divided into two sections The necessary equipment and software packages required for the installation process are described first After that separate sections describe the for installing your ADC module in a Series 90 30 baseplate and configuring it in Logicmaster 90 30 configuration software Section 1 Installing the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor ADC module in a Series 90 30 PLC baseplate Section 2 Configuring the ADC module in Logicmaster 90 configuration software Explains how to add an ADC module to the Series 90 30 I O configuration file 3 1 What You Will Need Before you can begin the installation procedure you must have the following ite
200. from Current Folder Directory of Files Currently Resident on PCM and in Current Folder Delete File s from PCM or Current Folder Delete All Files from PCM Cimplicity tm 90 Alphanumeric Display System Graphics Display System RACK J SLOT PLC 1D 70 C NADS_PCNTUTOR PCM 6 4 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Press the F9 key to go to the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS System installation and environment selection screen shown below CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CIL FOLDER UTILTY save load fe Ehdir nde Belear has o Press Tab Shft TAB to select DEVELOPMENT or EXECUTE ONLY CIMPLICITY M 90 ADS ADS Environment MAYJAN eae DEVELOPMENT or EXECUTE ONLY Listing of Files in ADS Folder PC PCOPNADS PCM ADS CDF ADSB EXE ADSBM HLP ADSDEV DAT ADSDM ENU ADSDM EXE ADSE EXE ADSEXE DAT ADS_MENU ADS_MENU ENV ADS_RUN ADSPRNT EXE STARTUP EXE PCMEXEC BAT ADSSETUP DAT ADSFLT EXE MENU EXE ADSP ID EXE SPOOL ENV ADSE ENV SPOOL EXE Total Bytes Available 7032832 Folder Size 628570 Bytes lt lt Press Enter Key to Begin ADS Installation gt gt lt EXECUTE ONLY fields default to RAM EMPTY OIT TBL ASCII TBL respectively gt lt lt Press PgUp or PgDn Key to Scroll Listing of Files gt gt ONLINE FACTORY C NADS_PCNTUTOR PCM INSERT PCM ID RACK J SLOT PLC ID DS This screen allows you
201. hat the original latched alarm entry is still in the table 29 Feb 88 20 46 67 VALVE ALARM EXAMPLES IS CLOSED Cstatus style Fi edi 2 45 43 29 Feb 88 Unlatched example 20 45 43 29 Feb 88 fAuto ack example Cannunciator style 28 44 31 29 Feb 88 Unlatched example 160 Deg 20 44 31 29 Feb 88 Latched example F4 Open valve F5 Close valve View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 67 If you now press the F9 key to acknowledge the alarms notice that all the alarms are now shown with a steady display indicating that they have been acknowledged Also the second command attached to that key has caused our temperature to be reset to 0 C 29 Feb 88 20 48 36 VALVE ALARM EXAMPLES IS CLOSED Cstatus style Fi edi 2 45 43 29 Feb 88 Unlatched example 20 45 43 29 Feb 88 fAuto ack example Cannunciator style 28 44 31 29 Feb 88 Unlatched example F4 Open valve F5 Close valve View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu Now press the F4 key to open the valve this also resets our alarm condition As a consequence all our acknowledged alarms are automatically removed from the alarm page 29 Feb 88 20 49 23 32 Deg VALVE ALARM EXAMPLES IS xOPENx Cstatus style Fi edi IS CLOSED Cannunciator style Deg F4 Open valve F5 Close valve FZ edi View Alarm Page Close Alarm
202. hat you choose a different folder for your V2 system A V1 system cannot be executed with the V2 or later ADS software until it has been converted The converted system will execute as before and will not require any manual editing on your part To execute the V1 to V2 conversion utility type the following command at the MS DOS prompt UPDV1V2 lt system name gt lt V1 source folder gt lt V2 destination folder gt where lt system name gt is the name of the V1 system to be converted lt V1 source folder gt is the full path specification for where to find the V1 system must be in a folder and lt V2 destination folder gt is an optional full path specification for where the V2 equivalent system is to be stored again which must be a folder If the lt V2 destination folder gt is not specified the converted system will be stored in the folder ADS_PC lt system name gt PCM If the specified destination folder does not exist it will be created automatically As the V1 system is being converted the conversion utility will display information concerning the process In the following example V1 system TEST is being converted into its equivalent V2 form The command UPDV1V2 TEST FOLDERS TEST PCM was typed in at the MS DOS prompt The converted system was placed in the folder ADS_PC TEXFCM C gt updyiu2 test folders test pcm C gt echo off Attempting to load v1 system folders test pcem test Loading system co
203. he need to replicate the information for each instance of use Care must be taken however to avoid chaining help indices together into an infinite loop Press RETURN to continue Press F1 for basic information on how to use the online facility including the use of multiple pages and chaining Press F2 for information only on how to use chaining within the online help facility 9 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 9 Now press the F1 key to access the general help information Note that you now have the option of pressing the Enter key for more help or of pressing the F10 key to close the help window ADS Help Facility Explained Up to 999 Help indices may be defined for a single system These indices function as entry points to one or more help screens which serve to provide the user with helpful information The syntax for specifying a help index is z lt index gt lt title gt where lt index gt is a value between 1 and 999 and lt title gt is an ASCII text string Press RETURN for more QUIT to continue Press F1 for basic information on how to use the online facility including the use of multiple pages and chaining Press F2 for information only on how to use chaining within the online help facility To view additional help information press the Enter key Note that the same size help window was maintained and that you again have
204. he bar chart is given the name DEG_C_BAR and is attached to existing data source TEMPERATURE since TEMPERATURE already supplies a Celsius value no additional calculation is required We would like to make our thermometer a little more high tech however Whenever the temperature is in the range of 80 to 100 degrees Celsius we want the bar chart to be displayed differently This is accomplished through the use of a display format With the cursor on the Display Format field press the Alt S key to open up a window of available display formats 999 Deg F 32 212 Fi edit degrees F 999 Deg C CO 108 F2 edit degrees C Data Source Additional Calc Display Format Direction Minimum Value Maximum Value Foreground DD MMM YY HH MM SS VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style VALVE IS Display Format CCreate Format F4 Create Bar C DEG _C_BAR TEMPERATURE UP 1 6808 1908 8800 WHITE Background BLACK CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Using a Display Format Again no display format is available so you ll need to create one Select the Create Format menu entry this will open up a display format data entry form on the screen Type in NORMAL_HIGHas the display format name Since the value the display format will operate on is a WORD value WORD is selected as the input data type Fora monochrome target terminal you will pro
205. he one on which you previously installed the PCOP software steps 1 3 above GFK 0499 Chapter 5 Installing the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software 5 3 5 4 The initial screen that will be displayed is the copyright screen shown below GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC CIMPLICITY TM 90 ADS SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE COPYRIGHT c 1991 GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC Published in a limited copyright sense and all rights including trade secret rights are reserved Unauthorized use of the information or program is strictly prohibited Installation of this software reaffirms acceptance of the terms and conditions of the license agreement distributed with this product If you wish to cancel the installation of this software hold down the CTRL key and press C When prompted with Terminate batch job Y N press Y To continue with the installation Strike a key when ready Press the Enter key and the files included in the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software will be copied to the PCOP ADS PCM PCOP BAT ADS_PC ADS_PC DEMO PCM and ADS_PCk demo system gt PCM directories of your hard drive which in this case is drive C The CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software has now been installed onto your hard drive The next step is to verify that your MS DOS PATH has been specified properly If you have an ADS operator interface system created with ADS Version 1 01 1 02 1 03 or 1 04 software that you want
206. hich is right for the terminal that you are using Table 7 1 Target Terminal Port Selection Target Terminal Terminal Table Port Selection GE Fanuc color OIT COM2 GE Fanuc monochrome OIT COM2 Nematron OptiTOUCH color OIT COM2 Nematron OptiTOUCH monochrome OIT COM2 GE Fanuc Mini OIT COM2 GE Fanuc Touch Mini OIT COM2 VT100 COM2 Lucas Deeco ST 2200 COM2 IBM PC with color display CIBM COM1 IBM PC with monochrome display MIBM COM1 The ADS Setup Utility screen lists which target terminals have been included for support You will notice that the COIT MOIT TMINI and CIBM terminal tables are always included since they are resident in the firmware on the ADC module The MIBM MINI TCOIT TMOIT VT100 and orLUDCO terminal tables may also be included at a small cost of available memory on the ADC module Do not include any of these terminals that you do not need GFEK 0499 Chapter 7 ADS Setup Utility 7 9 To change the target terminal selections execute the Target Terminal Selections menu option The following screen will be displayed on your computer s display CIMPLICITY Ctm gt 90 ADS Setup Utility Version 4 61 HOST COMPUTER SELECTIONS Monochrome Generic ASCII Printer Normal IBM Character Set Target Terminal Selections TARGET TERMINAL CON2 Terminal Connected To MILKA COM1 Terminals Sup comz MIBM TBL Not Included TARGET PRINTER MINI TBL Not Included Printers Supp TCOIT TEL Not
207. hich screen you want to define keys ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal COIT lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate 1 Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate a Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN BG s 58 s MAIN C Dx New screen Modify screen Screen paint Delete screen Copy screen List screens Print screen details Enter the number of the screen to modify DE Since we want to define keys for screen 1 MAIN enter 1 in the field and press the Enter key A data entry form for the screen 1 key assignments will be opened on the screen ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Screen key assignments for MAIN lt 1 GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 45 Enter the key assignments shown below ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Screen key assignments for MAIN 1 gt DYN_EDITC1 DEG_F_UALUE REVERSE DYMN_EDITC1 DEG_C_UALUE REVERSE PLCSETBCZ2 1 0 gt PLCSETBCZ2 1 gt EXITO Function key one is set up to begin a field edit of dynamic object DEG_F_VALUE on screen 1 DYN_EDIT is the command for beginning a field edit You must enter a screen number along with the dynamic object s name since dynamic object names need to be unique only within a single screen not among different screens The third item or parameter in the command
208. iator style OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE CLOSE ACK ALARM ALL PAGE ALARMS UIEW ALARM PAGE OPTIONS Text Static Drawing Rectangles The next step is to draw a thermometer onto the screen which will be filled when the system is executed Position the cursor at the lt 3 29 gt lt row column gt position Press the F3 key to begin to select a region Use the cursor keys to move over to column 33 in row 3 and then directly down in column 33 to row 15 Note that the entire region is displayed in reverse video DD MM YY Y H MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 Edit degrees F VALVE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE 999 Deg C CG 1800 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS TUTOR 1 Row Col EE Text Static Now press the F5 key which causes a rectangle to be drawn along the inside of the selected region s outer edges DD MM YY H MM SS 999 Deg F C32 212 Edit degrees F VALVE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE 999 Deg C CA 100 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL PAGE PAGE ALARMS TUTOR 1 Row Col Text Static CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Use the same technique to draw a box around some
209. ich you installed the PCOP and ADS software OI_MENU Pull down the ADS menu and select the ADSSETUP option EXIT DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITY lt tm gt 98 ADS TERMSET CREATHLP EXIT Return to LM9 Main Menu XREF TERMF lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press CHome for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 82 GFK 0499 Chapter 5 Installing the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software 5 9 The following screen will be displayed l CIMPLICITY Ctm gt 98 ADS Setup Utility l Version 4 61 DEVELOPMENT VERSION SELECTIONS EXECUTE ONLY VERSION SELECTIONS Menu 78672 Executor 246144 Builder 257040 Fault Table Module 93136 Executor 199248 Max System Cbytes 293312 Max System Cbytes 97632 Development Version Selections Execute Only Version Selections Page 2 Selections Leave Setup PAGE 1 OF Z You will see five different categories of setup information on the screen organized on two screen pages development version selections execute only version selections host computer selections target terminal selections and target printer selections A selection menu is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the screen Each of the selections is explained below The first two development vers
210. ies 90 70 2 2 restart reset pushbutton B 4 troubleshooting 2 7 WYE cable for Series 90 30 ADC Help utility Host computer selections J 7 7 Host computer specifying 1C690CBL705 5 14 1C697CBL701 5 14 1C697CBL702 5 14 Inserting a module Series 90 30 ihe CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software 5 1 Installing the Series 90 30 ADC B 2 steps for troubleshooting what you will need Installing the Series 90 70 ADC R 2 steps for troubleshooting what you will need Invoking TERME K Key functions system building system execution 6 12 Index LED OK 2 4 LED PORT 1 and PORT 2 P 4 3 4 LEDs 2 4 Listing cross references 10 1 Listing PID loop definitions 10 1 Listing system non touch terminals touch uch terminal 73 Lithium battery Logicmaster_ 90 30 configuration soft ware 3 8 Logicmaster 90 70 configuration soft ware Loop definitions listing of Lucas Deeco ST 2200 2 21 installation of z Managing your folders Menu operator interface products 11 1 MIBM A 2 Mini OIT installation of Mini Touch OIT installation of Module insertion of 3 6 Monochrome IBM PC installation of 4 8 a OIT terminal installation of 4 2 N New selections installing on ADC mod ule Non touch terminals color or monochrome PC compatible 6 13 development tutorial 6 13 mini OIT 6 13 monochrome or color OIT vt100 compatible O Off line P
211. in the alarm page at any one time Once a latched alarm is logged in an alarm page the entry must be acknowledged by the operator before any new instances of it are logged CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Updating the Main Screen s Key Assignments Now that we have finished creating our options screen and our alarm handling we need to modify our main screen s key assignments accordingly Use the Esc key to return to the Builder s main menu and then choose Screen Operations Choose the Key Assignments menu option and select the MAIN screen screen 1 Add key assignments for function keys 7 8 9 and 14 as shown below ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Screen key assignments for MAIN lt 1 DYN_EDITC1 DEG_F_UALUE REVERSE DYN_EDITC1 DEG_C_UALUE REVERSE PLCSETBCZ2 G1 0 gt PLCSETBCZ2 1 gt PSHALMC1 POPALMC1 ACK_ALARMO PLCSETWCZ1 gt PSHSCNC 100 EXITO The PSHALM 1 and POPALM 1 commands will provide for the displaying or removing from display respectively alarm page 1 Two commands separated by a space are assigned to function key 9 The first of these ACK_ALARM is used to acknowledge all currently unacknowledged alarms The second command PLCSETW Z1 0 sets our temperature reading to 0 Note that a command script containing these two commands could also have been used here rather than defining both commands in the
212. inal COIT lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate B8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Load system Save system to disk Modify current directory Execute system in RAM Clear system Print destination QOrPOrPFNADOOrF Loading File TUTOR CFG GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 49 Executing the System Now let s execute our system Select the Execute system in RAM menu option ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal COIT CCOM1 gt Default Scan Rate B8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Load system Save system to disk Modify current directory Refresh system in RAM Clear system Print destination QOrPOrPFNAODOOe When you execute this menu option your computer screen will change to the terminal emulation screen and automatically soft reset the ADC module Once on this screen you can reset the Builder by press
213. indow Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 62 11 4 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 From any point in the Operator Interface Products Menu you may obtain context sensitive help by pressing the Home key For example pressing the Home key in the example above would result in the following help display OE EXIT System Name HELP The system name is the name that will be given to your ADS system It consists of 1 5 alphanumeric and underscore C characters and is NOT case sensitive A system name must always be specified If no PATH is specified the system will be located in the folder ADS_PC lt system name gt PCM Note that text entry is always performed in replace mode no insert capability is supported Press ENTER for more Esc to quit lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 62 GFK 0499 Chapter 11 The Operator Interface Products Menu 11 5 Appendix A Terminal Setup This appendix defines the setup requirements which must be selected for the terminals which can be used with the ADS system For serial port settings refer to Chapter 2 If you wish to change the default serial port settings refer to Appendix D The terminal emulation package TERME must be invoked when using a PC to emulate a VT100 terminal A procedure f
214. ine for assistance Congratulations you have now completed installing all of your ADC modules into your Series 90 30 PLC system After verifying that all of their MODULE OK LEDs are ON you must now tell the PLC CPU that they are there This is done by configuring the ADC modules in Logicmaster 90 30 software You should now go to the next section for instructions on how to configure the ADC module using the Logicmaster 90 Programming Software package GFK 0499 Chapter 3 Getting Started Series 90 30 PLC Users 3 7 Section 2 Configuring the ADC Module in Logicmaster 90 30 Software The second step in the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS installation procedure is to add the ADC module s you have installed to the Series 90 30 I O configuration file using Logicmaster 90 configuration software Note The following steps are for installing the ADC module only These steps should not be performed unless you are familiar with Logicmaster 90 30 configuration software which is described in GFK 0466 Logicmaster 90 30 Programming Software User s Manual You do not have to perform the following steps for a Series 90 30 ADC module using Logicmaster 90 30 configuration software You can configure the module using the Hand Held Programmer If you are going to use Logicmaster 90 software for configuration refer to the information on module configuration in Chapter 10 of GFK 0466 the Logicmaster 90 30 Programming Software User s Manual Start up your Logicma
215. information required for system planning and installation Describes the hardware components of a system and system configuration and provides installation and field wiring information for planning purposes and actual system installation GFK 0401 Workmaste II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation Describes installation and operation of the Workmaster II computer specifically when used as the programming device for a Series 90 Programmable Logic Controller GFK 0263 Logicmaster 90 70 Programming Software User s Manual Explains how to use the Logicmaster 90 software to configure the Series 90 70 Programmable Logic Controller and create application programs GFK 0265 Series 90 70 Programmable Controller Reference Manual Describes the programming instructions used to create application programs for the Series 90 70 Programmable Logic Controller GFK 0466 Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 and 90 20 Programming Software User s Manual Explains how to use the Logicmaster 90 30 software to configure the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller and create application programs GFK 0467 Series 90 30 90 20 Programmable Controllers Reference Manual Describes the programming instructions used to create application programs for the Series 90 30 Programmable Logic Controller GFK 0487 Series 90 PCM Development Software PCOP User s Manual Describes how to use the PCM programmer software PCOP and provides details for deve
216. ing Started Series 90 30 PLC Users 3 9 CONFIG VALID is displayed in the lower right corner of your display screen after the configuration is successfully validated When CONFIG INVALID is indicated the file can not be stored to the PLC A CONFIG INVALID status is most likely to occur where e Aslot in the PLC is vacant between the CPU and an ADC module You have now completed configuring your Series 90 30 ADC module s in Logicmaster 90 30 Go on to Chapter 4 which tells you how to set up and connect your display terminal CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Chapter Setting Up and Connecting the Display 4 Terminal This chapter provides you with the steps required to connect your display terminal to the Series 90 ADC module and set up the terminal for operation Find the terminal you are using in the following list go to that section and follow the steps to set up your terminal and connect it to the ADC module Refer to Appendix A for a description of the terminals and advantages to using one as opposed to another Note Before any of the steps in the following sections are performed the ADC module must have already been installed in the PLC and properly configured as described previously If you have not done this go back to Chapter 2 for Series 90 70 users or Chapter 3 for Series 90 30 users and follow the steps for module installation and configuration in Logicmaster softwar
217. ing the Alt Z key You should now begin to see text appearing on your target terminal s screen indicating that the various components of the ADS software have begun to execute and that the screens making up your system are being processed by the software Following that your startup screen will be displayed on the module The display should be similar to the screen below with the time and date fields on the screen displaying the time and date per the PLC CPUs real time clock 27 Feb 88 18 38 59 32 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS xOPENx Cstatus style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style gt Deg C lt O 100 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page F8 Close Alarm Page F9 Acknowledge Alarms F14 Options Menu 6 50 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 First let s see if we can get the mercury to rise in our thermometer Press the F2 key to begin a field edit of the Degrees Celsius value After you press the F2 key you should see the entire field displayed in reverse video and the 0 value initially displayed in the field should be blinking The lt and cursor keys can be used to move left and right within the field The cursor position is indicated by the corresponding character blinking Note that a reverse video blank will NOT blink if the cursor is on it If you want to clear the contents of the field y
218. ing to construct a system and employs fill in the blanks forms for data entry ADS does offer you a great deal of flexibility in how you can construct a system Rather than enforcing a single rigid structure you can choose how many screens should be used to display a given amount of data whether or not to employ pull down menus and pop up windows how to display alarm information to the operator which screens can be accessed from a given screen etc By taking some time to rough out an organization of the system you want to construct before actually beginning to build it will save you a lot of time and reduce the amount of trial and error rework you will need to do In particular you will want to rough out the overall structure of your system deciding what information you want to be accessible on a particular screen what actions you want the operator to be able to invoke on a particular screen and how you want the operator to be able to navigate between the various screens Since ADS connects serially to a terminal as opposed to how a monitor connects to a computer you will want to minimize the number of screen changes which can take several seconds an operator needs to make to carry out a particular task When you do need to display a new screen if you can use a small pop up window it will take less time to display than displaying a different full size screen For those of you who are using a touch terminal you will also need to
219. ining for the database is also displayed When the ADS software is first installed on your computer the default selections are Menu Builder Online Help and Executor which is all that most users should initially need It s possible to choose more options than will fit in memory If this happens the available database space will be shown as a negative number and an Error indicator will be blinking next to it To change the development version selections execute the Development Version Selections menu option The following screen will be displayed on your computer s screen l CIMPLICITY Ctm gt 90 ADS Setup Utility Version 4 61 Development Version Selections DEVELOPMENT VER Menu Builder Executor Max System Menu Included Builder MAME Not Included Database Printing SURE Online Help Not I Executor Included Print Spooler Not Included Fault Table Module Not Included PID Module Loop Setup Screen Not Included Not Included PAGE 1 OF Z CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 In this dialog box you have the option of Including or Not Including each of the optional components In some cases the selection of one option requires the selection of another this will be done for you automatically All components with the exception of the Menu program are optional for the development environment See Chapter 1 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference manual GFK 06
220. ion 1 Hard reset the ADC module If a system currently resides on the ADC module s hard disk ensure that you have an archived copy of it and then delete it from the ADC module using PCOP 2 Use the ADS Setup Utility see Chapter 7 to select the options for the execute only environment the host computer the target terminal specify the target terminal port as the port to which your terminal is actually connected typically COM2 for all but the CIBM and MIBM terminal tables and the target printer if a printer is being used 3 Use PCOP accessed either via the OI Menu program or by typing ADS at the MS DOS prompt to install the ADS software in execute only mode specifying the name you intend to use for your system the target terminal table and optionally the target printer table When the software installation is complete the ADS Executor will automatically attempt to find and execute the system If it does not exist in the currently selected folder PC drive which will be the case if this is a new system the error message Error opening system configuration file PC lt system name gt CFG will be displayed on the target terminal screen and the ADC module CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 will hard reset itself If the system is found you should exit the system this will also hard reset the ADC module see note above concerning removing a system from the RAM drive
221. ion of PCM is required If an extension is not provided an extension of PCM will be added any other extension is an error INSERT PCM ID RACK J SLOT 9 PLC ID 3Dg In this screen you are prompted to enter the name of a CIMPLICITY 90 ADS program folder While any folder may be specified it is recommended that C ADS_PC TUTORCM be used as the folder Type in TUTOR and press the Enter key GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 3 Note If you have not created the TUTOR folder previously you will be asked to confirm its creation After responding that the folder should be created the following screen will be displayed CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL FOLDER UTILTY Heonfigkmb tern Bstatusect i A sE oT o SERIES 90 PCM PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE Configure the PCM Develop Execute a MegaBasic Program Terminal Emulation Operating Status of PCM Control Functions Folder Functions Utility Save Load Clear Etc Exit PCM Software ONL INE FACTORY C NADS_PCN TUTOR PCM INSERT PCM ID RACK 9 SLOT PLC 1D DS This screen is the PCOP software main menu Now press the F9 key to enter the Utility Menu The following screen will be displayed CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL FOLDER UTILTY Have Plo Be Ebdir A a a Ends o PROGRAM UTILITY FUNCTIONS Save File s From PCM to Current Folder Load File s To PCM
222. ion selections and execute only version selections are available on page 1 and specify what major software features are available for the two operating modes of the ADS software These modes and how to customize them are explained in detail in Chapter 7 You will not need to change them now as the default selections of Menu Builder and Executor for the development version and Executor and Fault Table Module for the execute only version are those which are needed to support the demonstration systems and the development tutorial you will initially be working with The host computer selections are available on page 2 and indicate whether you have a computer with a monochrome or color display among other things If the currently displayed selection does not match your actual hardware you will need to change it Either cursor to the Page 2 Selections menu entry and press the Enter key or just press the P key Then if you need to change the host computer monitor selection either cursor to the Host Computer Selections menu entry and press the Enter key or just press the H key CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 The following will be displayed on your computer screen CIMPLICITY Ctm gt 98 ADS Setup Utility Version 4 61 HOST COMPUTER SELECTIONS Monochrome Generic ASCII Printer Normal IBM Character Set TARGET TERMINAL SELECTIONS CON2 Terminals Supported COIT MOIT TMINI CI
223. it degrees F VALVE IS 0PEN Cstatus style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE 27 Deg C CO 100 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS 6 124 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Now let s turn our attention to our valve At first glance the display seems to be quite contradictory in that the valve is shown to be both open and closed However remember that the second valve display is a fixed text string which is shown in normal video when the valve is actually open and in reverse video when closed Thus both displays are really telling us the same thing Press the CLOSE VALVE touch area to close the valve observing the changes made to the display on the screen 3 Apr 88 23 39 64 8 Deg F C32 212 Edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cstatus style TRE oe Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE 27 Deg C CO 100 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS Since we ve now verified that the basic components of our system are functioning let s go back and complete the remainder of our system Press the OPTIONS MENU touch area to exit the system Depending on what target terminal you have selected you may or may not see the exiting messages shown below However you should see the gt characters displayed
224. ivate the touch point areas previously laid out on the screen Basically we will be simulating part of a real keyboard in activating the touch points thus these touch areas will send a key code very similar to the one sent by a real keyboard when a key is depressed Appendix B in this manual presents all the character codes you will need to use in activating your touch points The key sequence Insert Delete will display the touch point grid if it is not already displayed and begin prompting you for the key code to be assigned to each touch point supported by the target terminal An edit field is initially opened up in the top left touch point area This field will be overlaid on top of the screen making it look like some of your screen characters have been deleted Don t worry though as the characters are still there underneath the field In fact you will notice that as you successively enter values for touch point areas causing more edit fields to be opened that more and more of your screen will be overlaid in this manner If you don t want a particular touch area to return a key code value just leave it blank You can move to the next touch point area by pressing the Enter key the T cursor key will take you back to the previous touch point area If you want to erase the value in the current touch point area press the Ctrl X key You cannot make a touch point area smaller than the minimum size supported for your target te
225. key Since the data source does not currently exist a data entry form is opened up for its definition It should be filled in as shown below Note the source location is specified as Z2 0 This specifies that a single bit of data should be extracted from bit bO the lowest order bit in the word stored at Z2 DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 Z1 Edit degrees F VALUE IS EEEEEEE lt status style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE 999 Deg C CG Create Dynamic Object i UALVE_STATUS Data Source VALUE Additional Calc e Create a data source ALUE TATE Name U Source Data Type S z X Source Location 206 Scan Rate x or HH MM SS CC gt Additional Calc After completing the definition of data source VALVE you will be returned to the dynamic object s data entry form Note that a STATE data source always returns either the text string OFF for a 0 state or ON for a 1 state However we want to see either OPEN or CLOSED instead This will require us to use a lookup table entry to make the conversion Select the Additional Calculation field press the Alt S key for the Object List window and then select Create Lookup A data entry form for a lookup table entry is opened on the screen Fill it out as shown below UTOR AN ADS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM UTOR AN ADS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 Edit degrees F VALUE IS EEEE
226. l print out an ASCII character substitution instead The EPSON printer table not only supports database printing from within the Builder when the ADC based Builder is being used but it also supports screen prints triggered by the TTDUMP command from within the Executor To change the target printer selections execute the Select Target Printer menu option The following screen will be displayed on your computer s display l CIMPLICITY Ctm gt 90 ADS Setup Utility l Version 4 61 HOST COMPUTER SELECTIONS Monochrome Generic ASCII Printer Normal IBM Character Set TARGET TERMINAL SELECTIONS comz Terminals Supported COIT MOIT TMINI CIBM TARGET PRINTER Target Printer Selections Printers Supp PCNEC TBL LSR greg TUT Cohen a ET Included LA108 TEL Not Included EPSON TBL Not Included PAGE 2 OF Z In this dialog box you will have the option of including the PCNEC LA100and or EPSON printer tables GFK 0499 Chapter 7 ADS Setup Utility 7 11 Section 9 Leaving the Setup Utility After making any changes that you want to make execute the Leave Setup menu option If you have made any changes the ADS Setup Utility will prompt you to confirm that the changes should be saved Any changes saved will be stored and used the next time the ADS Setup Utility is run Section 10 Installing the New Selections on the ADC Module The ADS Setup Utility does not automatically install your selections on the ADC module you mus
227. lay format data entry form you are again returned to the dynamic object data entry form It should be completed as shown below OPTIONS MENU View the PLC Fault Table View the 1 0 Fault Table XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXAXK Return to the main screen Exi Create Dynamic Object Name PLC_FLT_STAT Data Source PLC_FAULTS Additional Calc Display Format STATUS_STRNG Display Value Y CYN Hex Notation N Left Justify Y zero Fill N Available for Edit J Display format added to system GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 57 6 58 Using the techniques for copying a dynamic object originally learned in step 10 copy the just created dynamic object PLC_FLT_STAT to the dynamic object paste buffer position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 5 34 gt and paste the dynamic object there OPTIONS MENU Uieu the PLC Fault Table XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXAK View the I O Fault Table Return to the main screen Exi Copy Dynamic Object Name Data Source PLC_FAULTS Additional Calc Display Format STATUS_STRNG Display Value Y CYN Hex Notation N Left Justify Y Zero Fill N Available for Edit N Fill out the dynamic object data entry form as shown creating data source IO_FAULTS as part of the effort it is filled out identically to data source PLC_FAULTS except that the Source Location field should be specified as PLC_STATUS 5 PLC_ST
228. lay terminals The Series 90 70 ADC module has two serial port connectors which support both RS 232 and RS 485 modes of operation These serial ports are identical and either port can be used for most applications The two ports are configurable for different communication parameters In a typical Series 90 ADC application you will attach a computer to port 1 and a terminal to port 2 The connector pin assignments for the Series 90 70 ADC are shown below a42734 SHIELD rowan RESERVED RS 232 TD Or RESERVED RS 232 RD J 8 4 RESERVED spe ab Onm RESERVED RS 232 CTS Oa RESERVED NO CONNECTION TO a S SIGNAL GROUND TOS RESERVED RS 232 DTR RS 232 DCD ore RS 485 SD B RS 485 SD A He 4 RS 485 RTS B RS 485 RTS A H io DET RS 485 CTS B RS 485 CTS A H TERMINATION RD TERMINATION CTS Hira RS 485 RD B RS 485 RD A oo Figure C 1 Serial Port Pin Assignments for the Series 90 70 ADC Note In the figure above SD Send Data and RD Receive Data are the same as TXD and RXD used in the Series Six PLC A and B are the same as and A and B denote inputs and A and B denote outputs To terminate the RS 485 CTS input signal jumper pins 11 and 12 to terminate the RD input signal jumper pins 24 and 25 GFK 0499 C 1 c Serial Port Pin Assignments on the Series 90 30 ADC Module The Series 90 30 ADC has a single serial connecto
229. ld be displayed on your computer screen When the installation is completed you should see the following screen on your computer s display TERMF terminal emulator copyright 1988 1989 GE Fanuc Press ALT Z keys to return to programmer main menu and this display on your target terminal The error message Error opening system configuration file RAM TUTOR CFG means that the ADS Executor did not find the TUTOR system on the ADC module s RAM disk this is OK since we haven t created the system yet MBX Driver installed ADS Shareable Image Driver installed ADS User Image Driver installed ADS device installation completed successfully ce 1989 1992 GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC ADS shareable images successfully installed ADS FAULT TABLE shareable images successfully installed c 1989 1992 GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC PLC is currently executing task ADS Privilege level set DATA MANAGER Started Error opening system configuration file RAM TUTOR CFG ce 1989 1992 GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 7 Your computer screen should now show the characters gt on it indicating that the ADC module has hard reset itself If you don t see these characters either press the Enter key on your target terminal s keyboard or alternatively hard reset the ADC module TERMF terminal emulato
230. license agreement distributed with this product PRESS lt ENTER gt TO CONTINUE INSTALLATION OR lt ESC gt TO EXIT When the PCOP software is finished being installed open the shrink wrapped package labeled CIMPLICITY 90 ADS SOFTWARE fill out the registration card and mail it today to ensure that this software is registered with GE Fanuc Insert the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software diskette into drive A of your computer You will need to tell the ADS installation program two things the drive id of your computer s hard drive on which you want the software installed and which demonstration systems you want copied to your hard drive Demonstration systems are available for the GE Fanuc color OIT COIT the GE Fanuc monochrome OIT MOIT the GE Fanuc mini OIT MINI the GE Fanuc touch mini OIT TMINI VT100 compatible VT100 color computer CIBM monochrome computer MIBM Nematron color OptiTOUCH TCOIT Nematron monochrome OptiTOUCH TMOIT and the Lucas Deeco ST 2200 LUDCO terminals Each of the demonstration systems will require approximately 120 000 bytes of storage on your hard disk During the installation process you can elect to either a copy all the demonstration systems b copy none of the demonstration systems or c copy your choice of from one to three of the demonstration systems CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 The table below identifies the keywords to u
231. lled in them The default setting for PCOP CGA with snow functions as a lowest common denominator and will work for any of the designated video cards You may still want to change this item for slightly better screen response when using your computer as a terminal CIBM or MIBM terminal tables If your computer has a monochrome video adapter MDA card you MUST change this item Executing PCOP on a computer using an MDA video adapter card with the video adapter selected as any other type will lead to a blank display on your computer screen Note Your computer may have a CGA EGA or VGA video adapter card even if it uses a monochrome monitor e g the GE Fanuc Workmaster II which has a VGA video adapter but a monochrome monitor You should be certain that your computer has an MDA video adapter before configuring PCOP as MDA By default PCOP assumes you will be communicating with a Series 90 70 ADC module If you communicate with a Series 90 30 ADC module instead PCOP will warn you of this fact This warning is harmless and can be ignored However if desired this setting may be changed to avoid receiving the warning If you want to make any changes to PCOPs terminal configuration file type the command OI_MENU at the MS DOS prompt pull down the ADS menu and select the TERMSET option then follow the directions given in Using TERMSET in appendix D of this manual for how to use TERMSET Chapter 5 Installing the CI
232. loping applications for the PCM GFK 0505 Operator Interface Terminal OIT Explains how to install startup and program the OIT GFK 0361 Operator Interface Terminal Mini OIT Supplement Explains how to power up operate and configure the Mini OIT We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions viii At GE Fanuc automation we strive to produce quality technical documentation After you have used this manual please take a few moments to complete and return the Reader s Comment Card located on the next page Henry A Konat Senior Technical Writer CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Contents Chapter 1 Introduction to CIMPLICITYr90 ADS 0 0 cee eee 1 1 Section 1 Product Summary cece eee eee eee e eee 1 1 External Intertace s 0403 20 te eid oles Beth eh cece Seeds fn od E E Meal dh ot og 1 1 Product Organization sessin o mee aaen o E oa aE E E ETETE a EES 1 3 Product Capacity rra eia o o E E E E EEE E E e SE 1 3 Chapter 2 Getting Started Series 90 70 PLC Users 00005 2 1 What You Will Need serine ra EEEE E A E A EEA E AS 2 2 Section 1 Installing the Series 90 70 ADC Module 2 3 Section 2 Configuring the ADC Module in Logicmaster 90 70 Software s eree Gk AGS 2558 d5Gle 5s Saree aa eS 2 8 Chapter 3 Getting Started Series 90 30 PLC Users 00000 3 1 What You Will Need perire n 0 eee eee eee ee eee EA e nee aes 3
233. lt 15 55 gt F14 Options Menu DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F C32 212 VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C cO 100 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page F8 Close Alarm Page F9 Acknowledge Alarms F14 Options Menu Text Static GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 23 Drawing Rectangles The next step is to draw a thermometer onto the screen which will be filled when the system is executed Position the cursor at the lt 3 29 gt lt row column gt position Press the F3 key to begin to select a region Use the cursor keys to move over to column 33 in row 3 and then directly down in column 33 to row 15 Note that the entire region is displayed in reverse video DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F C32 212 VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C cO 1800 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu Text Static Now press the F5 key which causes a rectangle to be drawn along the inside of the selected region s outer edges DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F C32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C c 1
234. ly version selections host computer selections target terminal selections and target printer selections A selection menu is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the screen Each of the selections are explained in detail below 7 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 2 Section 3 GFK 0499 Using the Setup Utility The ADS Setup Utility is organized as a simple pick and choose menu system The current menu selection is shown in reverse video You may select a different menu selection by using the and keys Pressing the Enter key will execute the currently selected menu entry Note that the Enter key may be labeled Return on some keyboards if your keyboard has a second Enter key located in the numeric keypad area only the Enter key located with the QWERTY keys should be used Executing the menu entry will result in either a field value being entered or in a dialog box being overlaid on the screen Alternatively you can press the key that corresponds to the first character of the menu selection you want to execute and that selection will immediately be executed Entering field values in a dialog box see following sections are accomplished in the same manner as described above for executing a menu selection An additional key the Esc key may be used to Quit the dialog box without saving any of the changes you may have made in that dialog box A di
235. m of your terminal s display These two items are a consequence of the action associated with the logging of the latched alarm TUTOR AN ADS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM 29 Feb 88 26 45 18 212 Deg VALUE ALARM EXAMP IS CLOSED status style Fi edi 20 44 31 29 Feb 88 Unlatched example 20 44 31 29 Feb 88 Latched example Cannunciator style 20 44 31 29 Feb 88 fAuto ack example 108 Deg F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edi View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu Look at bar chart 6 66 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Now press the F4 key to open the valve Note that the entry corresponding to the auto acknowledge alarm has been removed from the alarm page This is because when an acknowledged alarm transitions out of its alarm state it is automatically removed from all alarm pages it is logged to 29 Feb 88 20 45 26 VALVE ALARM EXAMP IS xOPENx Cstatus style Fi edi 2 44 31 29 Feb 88 Unlatched example 28 44 31 29 Feb 88 Latched example IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 108 Deg F4 Open valve F5 Close valve FZ edi View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu Pressing the F5 key to again close the valve triggers the alarm condition again Note that a second entry corresponding to the unlatched alarm is now in the table that a new entry for the auto acknowledge alarm is logged in the table and t
236. m the PCOP main menu by pressing the TERMF F3 function key If the ADS software is executing on the ADC module pressing CTRL W will refresh the terminal display Note If you should exit TERMF via either the Alt Z or Ctrl Break key sequence to perform some operation and then re enter TERME the Ctrl W key must be pressed to refresh the display Returning to PCOP The Alt Z key combination enables you to return to PCOP from TERME Pressing Ctrl Break exits to DOS When the symbol gt is displayed on the TERMF screen an ADC hard reset has occurred You may need to return to PCOP If you were in TERME press Alt Z to return to PCOP or press Ctrl Break to exit to DOS and re enter PCOP The ADC module must be soft reset to restart the Access 90 Display System software Executing TERMF Directly TERMF may be accessed directly either through the Operator Interface Products Menu OI Menu or by executingthe PCOP BAT IBM_TERM BA file Appendix A Terminal Setup A 3 A 4 OE EXIT BUILD PCOP ADS DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 DS TERMSET CREATHLP EXIT Return to LM98 Main Menu XREF lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 62 Aslongas PCOP
237. m to match the settings shown Chapter 4 Setting Up and Connecting the Display Terminal 4 3 Note If you are using a Nematron color or monochrome OptiTOUCH terminal the KEYBOARD field should be set to 5 Programmable instead of 1 as shown After verifying the settings press the F5 SAVE function key to store the settings you just specified The SAVE function key is highlighted as the menu is saved For some firmware revisions you will need to cursor to the SAVE field on the screen and then press the ENTER key Press the F7 or the Home key to exit the Configuration Menu screen and put the OIT Online Connect the OIT to the ADC module Use the IC690CBL705 cable supplied with your CIMPLICITY 90 ADS package Connect the female end of the cable to the port labeled PRIMARY DTE on the back of the OIT then connect the other end of the cable to PORT 2 on the ADC module If you are using the IC690CBL705 cable to connect your IBM PS 2 or GE Fanuc Workmaster II computer to the ADC you must order another of the same cable to connect to your OIT or make your own cable If you are making your own cable the applicable wiring diagrams are provided in Appendix B This completes the installation of your terminal Go on to Chapter 5 which tells you how to copy the ADS software onto your computer and install it on your ADC module s CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 2 Using a GE Fanuc
238. mation across the top of the screen On the left hand side of the screen are items that you will create along with the current quantities listed for each of these items On the right hand side of the screen is a window containing a menu listing a group of operations which are accessible from the main menu screen You will interact with a number of these menu items throughout this tutorial GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 15 System Configuration Press the Enter key to access the Configuration Operations submenu ADS BUILDER Current System Name Terminal MPC Printer Dir lt C0M2 gt CNULL gt ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Seoooooao0ooaq Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 08 s Startup Screen ADS Print Destination TUTOR 1 88 s STDPRN Modify system parameters PLC data sources Display formats Translation table Engineering unit conversion Lookup table Command scripts Press the Enter key to access the Modify System Parameters data entry form ADS BUILDER Current System Name Terminal MPC Printer Dir lt C0M2 gt CNULL gt ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display
239. menu screen TERMSET vu 2 27 Please select the desired function BASIC SETUP display change comm port settings display change video adapter settings CUSTOM CONFIGURATIONS display change keyboard settings display change attribute settings display change normal keybindings display change application mode keybindings display change cursor key mode keybindings display change palette settings EXIT TERMSET save file including any changes and exit quit discard any changes Your selection please Pressing the E key at this point will save the two changes you have made Note You should not need to make any modifications on any other screen of TERMSET If you do make changes on one of the other screens the ADS software may not execute as expected If you want to restore the original communications file which came on the ADS distribution diskette you must do the following If you need to restore the default standard communications file type in the following command at the MS DOS prompt COPY PCOP BAT ADS_TERM ORG PCOP BAT ADS_TERM DAT If you need to restore the default user communications file type in the following command at the MS DOS prompt COPY PCOP BAT ADS_USER ORG PCOP BAT ADS_USER DAT Any time that the ADC module is hard reset you must access the PCOP software by typing ADS at the MS DOS prompt If you have modified the serial port settings for port 1 any time that the ADS software is executing you
240. ms 1 A Series 90 30 Model 331 or Model 341 Programmable Logic Controller PLC 2 A computer with a hard disk This may be A Workmaster II industrial computer or IBM PersonalSystem 2 PS 2 personal computer AnIBMPC XTorAT personal computer with an 83 key or 101 key keyboard An industrial IBM AT computer with a standard 101 key keyboard A Workmaster or Cimstar I industrial computer with an 83 key or 101 key keyboard 3 A Logicmaster 90 system including software hardware and appropriate cables Refer to either the Logicmaster 90 30 Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0466 for more information 4 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS package IC693ADS301 which includes An Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module ADC to install and test catalog number IC693ADC311 for a Series 90 30 PLC CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software Manual GFK 0449 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual PCM Utility software PCOP IC641SWP061 and User s manual The following three RS 232 cables IC690CBL701 for a Workmaster industrial computer IC690CBL702 for an IBM PC AT or compatible personal computer IC690CBL705 for a Workmaster II or an IBM PersonalSystem 2 personal computer 5 One of the following terminals or computers GE Fanuc OIT color or monochrome Mini or Mini Touch Screen OIT VT100 compatible terminal Workmaster or I
241. n Rate 1 Default Alarm Scan Rate a Startup Screen ADS Print Destination 08 s 58 s STDPRN MAIN DX Create Screen Screen Name NUMKEYPD Screen Number 3988 Start Row 1 Rows 15 Start Column 48 Columns 32 Image J Norm Rev Trans gt Foreground WHITE Background BLACK GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 113 Upon completing the Create Screen dialog box you will enter the screen painter for the numeric keypad screen number 900 The dashed vertical and horizontal lines about the upper right corner of the display indicates where the new screen would be displayed on the target terminal screen Press the Delete key to toggle on the touch point grid TUTOR 908 Row Col 9 Text Static We now need to draw the buttons we need for our numeric keypad First press the F1 key to pull down the video attributes menu and select Reverse Re should be displayed in the status line Use the F3 select key and the cursor keys to select the region between lt row column gt position lt 1 2 gt and lt 3 8 gt and then press the F5 key to draw a reverse video line Note that the button resides within a touch point area TUTOR 908 Row Col A Text Static 6 114 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Use the same technique to create the remainder of the buttons we will need for
242. nd maximum value bounds need to be changed to Fahrenheit values 32 and 212 SYSTEM SYSTEM DD MMM YY HH MM SS REE Deg F C32 21D Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE 999 Deg C CG Copy Dynamic Object Name DEG _F_UALUE Data Source TEMPERATURE dditional Calc DEGC_TO_DEGF Display Format Display Value Y CY N Hex Notation Min 32 Left Justify Max 212 zero Fill Available for Edit Immediate write Translation entry added to system 6 100 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Creating a Bar Chart Next we want to create a bar chart that will represent mercury rising in the thermometer Position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 4 30 gt press the Alt F7 key to begin defining a dynamic object move the cursor first to lt 4 32 gt and then to lt 14 32 gt This time you press the Alt F2 key to complete the dynamic object a menu selection form is opened asking you what type of predefined object you want to create AN ADS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM Trend Chart 1980 DD MMM Y Y HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 21D Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE 999 Deg C CA 1800 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL PAGE J ALARNS TUTOR 1 Row Col Text Dynamic def ining GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating
243. nd sentence beginning with see below Page 7 8 first paragraph added LUDCO after VT100 Page 7 9 added entry for Lucas Deeco to table deleted footnotes at bottom of table and added LUDCO after VT100 in paragraph following the table Page 7 10 added LUDCO after VT100 Page 7 11 added sentence in second paragraph beginning with The only difference between Page 8 1 previous chapter 8 has been completely replaced by the text and screen examples in this chapter 8 Page 9 5 added text and two screen examples beginning with There are two Page 10 1 added text and two screen examples at top of page beginning with There are two methods Page 11 1 added chapter 11 Page A 1 added or a Lucas Deeco to last sentence in first paragraph Page A 2 added terminal setup requirements for the Lucas Deeco terminal added text beginning with either through the to second bulleted item added screen example and in last bulleted item changed PCOP is accessed to PCOP can be directly Page A 4 added text beginning with either through the to first sentence and added screen example after first sentence In the sentence beginning with If you have changed ADS_SET TERMSET to TERMSET added the text beginning with or by choosing after TERME followed by a new screen example Page D 1 in second sentence of second paragraph add
244. nfiguration parameters from TEST CFG Loading system alarm definitions from TEST ALM Verifying system configuration done Attempting to load v1 screen ONE 1 Loading screen ONE 1 Verifying screen ONE 1 done Attempting to load v1 screen TWO ae ee Loading screen TWO 2 Verifying screen TWO 2 done Attempting to save vZ system TEST Saving system configuration parameters in TEST CFG Saving system alarm definitions in TEST ALM Saving screen ONE 1 Saving screen TWO 2 Saving v2 system TEST completed successfully CiN E 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFEK 0499 A ADC 1 2 based executor installation of installation Series 90 30 installation Series 90 70 lithium battery Series 90 30 module location in system as i maximum per 90 30 system 3 7 ie maximum per 90 70 system 2 6 ADS 1 1 Boii 90 ADS introduction to 1 1 cross reference utility 10 1 development environment customiz meld environments execute only environment customiz ing help utility D 1 introduction to off line pc based builder operation overview SETUP setup utility software setup utility 5 9 system configuration typical typical ADS system configuration Adsxref Adsxref utility running Alarm pages number of Alarm sources number of Appendix ASCII codes changing default port settings con
245. nload the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software 6 1 Section 2 The Development Tutorial 0000 6 9 Overview of Product Operation 00000cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 9 Going Through the Tutorial 2 s icwetgasth stent Gwent sland 6 9 Section 3 Development Tutorial for Non Iouch Terminals 6 13 Section 4 Development Tutorial for Touch Terminals 6 77 Chapter 7 ADS Setup WG Ly seess ar a E 7 1 Section 1 Entering the ADS Setup Utility 7 1 Section 2 Using the Setup Utility 0 eee eee 7 3 Section 3 The ADS Environments 0 ee eee wees 7 3 Section 4 Customizing the ADS Development Environment 7 4 Section 5 Customizing the ADS Execute Only Environment 7 6 Section 6 Specifying the Host Computer 7 7 Section 7 Specifying the Target Terminal 7 9 Section 8 Specifying the Target Printer 06 7 11 Section 9 Leaving the Setup Utility 00 7 12 Section 10 Installing the New Selections on the ADC Module 7 12 Chapter 8 ADS Off Line PC Based Builder 0 ccc cece eens 8 1 Section 1 Accessing The Builder 0 cece eee eee 8 1 Section 2 Managing Your Folders cc eee ee eeee 8 3 Section 3 Building Your System cece eee eee eee 8 5 Before YouStart 2 i ents dee eet ine dae bot tetas Seba 8 5 What To Do Before Creating Your Fi
246. not be performed without first reviewing the applicable chapters of your VT100 compatible Terminal manual Turn on the VT100 or compatible terminal and press the SETUP key to display the SETUP MENU Press the SETUP A B key Fill in the Configuration Menu as follows 1 SRORMORO 2 WT gt ENE 4 Er T SPEED 19200 R SPEED 19200 Bit definitions for parameters 2 and 4 are Parameter 2 Parameter 4 0011 0010 V1 __S W Handshaking __8 bits character ANSI Escape Sequences Connect the VT100 to the ADC module Use the IC690CBL705 cable supplied with your CIMPLICITY 90 ADS package Connect the female end of the cable to the appropriate serial port on the back of the VT100 then connect the other end of the cable to PORT 2 bottom connector on the ADC module If you are using the IC690CBL705 cable to connect your IBM PS 2 or compatible or GE Fanuc Workmaster II computer you must order another of the same cable to connect to your VT100 or make your own cable If you are making your own cable the applicable wiring diagrams are provided in Appendix B This completes the installation of your terminal Go on to Chapter 5 which tells you how to copy the ADS software onto your computer and install it on your ADC modules Chapter 4 Setting Up and Connecting the Display Terminal 4 7 Section 4 Using a Monochrome or Color IBM Personal Computer or Compatible for the Display Terminal If the terminal you have selected is an IBM or
247. ns 30 Image N CNorm Rev Trans gt Foreground WHITE Background BLACK L 6 82 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 6 nn Enter a screen name of MAIN and a screen number of 1 The start row rows start column columns and image fields may all be left as their defaults If you are using a color terminal you may want to change the foreground and background colors to something other than the white on black default Press the Enter key to complete or skip a field on the data entry form ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate 1 Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate B Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN G s 58 s Greate Screen Screen Name MAIN Screen Number 1 Start Row 1 Rows 15 Start Column 1 Columns 80 Image fj CNorm Rev Trans Foreground WHITE Background BLACK L I Upon completing the create screen data entry form you will automatically be placed into the screen painter for screen 1 Col f Text Static Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 83 6 84 Video Attributes and Double Size Text The dashed line towards the bottom of the screen indicates the lower bound of the screen area for your target t
248. ns to file This field allows you to include or not include the PID loop definitions in the Adsxref listing The selections are Y or N If you select Y the PID loop definitions will be included in the listing If you select N the PID loop definitions will not be included in the listing Xref Listing Options GFK 0499 When the Xref listing option is selected a data entry window is opened containing 13 fields which can be set by the user Cross References Listing screens reports alarm pages dynamic objects alarm sources data sources display formats translation entries eng units conversions lookup tables command scripts plc locations Chapter 10 The ADS Cross Reference Utility 10 11 ADS CROSS REFERENCE XREF LISTING OPTIONS Cross References Listing Print Destination Listing Format Include xref information for screens reports alarm pages screens dynamic ob jects alarm pages alarm sources reports data sources alarm sources display formats data sources translation entires display formats eng units conversions ing options translation entrie lookup tables option eng units convers command scripts lookup table entrij plc locations options to file command scripts The first field Cross References Listing selects whether or not the cross references should be included in the listing If this item is set to Y the cross references will be included in the listing If this item i
249. olumn 58 of row 7 rightmost character and then press the F7 key to complete the selection of the dynamic object Give the dynamic object a name of VALVE_ANNUN 999 Deg F 32 212 Edit degrees F 999 Deg C CB Edit degree Data Source Additional Calc Display Format Display Value DD MMM YY HH MM SS VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style TUREN Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE Create Dynamic Object UALUE_ANNUN Although in this case we probably remember that the data source we need already exists and is named VALVE let s assume that we can t remember Press the Alt S key to open up the object list noting that VALVE is the fourth data source in the list 999 Deg F 32 212 Edit degrees F 999 Deg C CB Edit degree Data Source Additional Calc Display Format Display Value DD MMM YY HH MM SS VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style CS eye Cannunciator style Plc Data Sources eN U PLC_TIME CData Srce TEMPERATURE Data Srce VALUE Data Srce Create Dynamic CCreate Data Source UALVE_ANNUN 6 108 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 You can press the 1 key to highlight it and then the Enter key to pick it from the list Since we want to control the video attributes of the text string we need to create a display format to do it Select the Display Format field and then press the Alt S key fo
250. omatically opened so that you can tell the ADS software some things about the object DDue HH MM SS 999 Deg F C32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C c 100 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page Create Dynamic Object Name Data Source Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 27 6 28 There are several commands in the ADS software which reference a dynamic object by screen number and the name of the object Thus dynamic object names only need to be unique from other objects on the same screen Type in the name DATE_DISPLAY and press the Enter key The Data Source field is selected next A data source is what links a dynamic object to a location or locations in the PLC Its name must be unique from all other data sources in a system but may be referenced by multiple dynamic objects Type in PLC_DATE and press the Enter key Since data source PLC_DATE has not yet been defined a data entry form for it is automatically opened up on the screen DDue HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style gt 999 Deg C lt a 10 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F 7 View Alarm Page Create Dynamic Object Name DATE_DISPLAY
251. on 5 Using a Lucas Deeco Model ST 2200 If the terminal you have selected is a Lucas Deeco model ST 2200 terminal use the following steps Note that the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software refers to this terminal as LUDCO NOTE The following steps should be used as a quick reference and for CIMPLICITY 90 ADS use only These steps should not be performed without first reviewing the applicable chapters of your Lucas Deeco model ST 2200 terminal manual STEP 1 Turn on the Lucas Deeco model ST 2200 terminal Wait for the text SELF TEST OK to appear in the upper left hand corner of the screen STEP 2 Touch the lower right hand corner of the touch screen to activate the QWERTY style touch keyboard STEP 3 z c G a a D oO PAD touch area located in the upper right hand corner of the QWERTY style touch keyboard This will activate the function pad touch keyboard STEP 4 Touch the Setup touch area the third touch box to the right of the upper left hand corner of the function pad touch keyboard This will activate the setup menus STEP 5 The following setup information should be entered it is broken down by the applicable setup category Any configuration item not explicitly detailed can be ignored General Terminal Mode VT320 7B Lock Keys NO Lock Features NO New Line NO Display Control Chars INTERPRET Auto Wrap OFF Status Line NONE CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual Ma
252. onger needs to be used in developing or executing a system Instead the PC based Builder should now be used for all your development needs Support for the development environment is maintained primarily for those customers currently experienced with it The ADS development environment is used primarily when you are developing a new ADS operator interface system It has a Menu Program and may optionally consist of a Builder a Database Printout utility for the Builder an Online Help facility for the Builder an Executor a Print Spooler a Fault Table Module and fr a PID Module including a loop setup screen Using the development environment is particularly effective when first learning about how the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software works or for using the Fault or PID option modules without needing to create a system first However because of memory limitations the development environment is not very effective in producing typical sized systems For the actual production of your system you are encouraged to use the PC based Builder see Chapter 8 in conjunction with the execute only environment see Section 5 in this chapter In the upper lefthand corner of the ADS Setup Utility s page 1 screen you will see the currently selected options for the development environment The numbers to the right of each selection indicate how much memory they will occupy which could otherwise be used for additional database space for your ADS system The memory rema
253. ons are utilized to properly initialize the PC based Builder see Chapter 8 You should specify either color or monochrome for your computer s monitor as appropriate Monochrome is the default choice and will function properly on color monitors as well Note that your selection should be based on your computer s actual monitor or screen and not based on which video adapter board is installed in the computer This selection is used by the ADS Setup utility itself in addition to being used by the PC based Builder Chapter 7 ADS Setup Utility 7 7 The host computer character set defaults to normal IBM which means that the computer s character set will be used in the PC based Builder This setting will work properly for all target terminals and is the setting of choice for use with the CIBM MIBM VT100 and LUDCO terminal tables You may want to use one of the other two settings OIT EGA resolution or OIT VGA resolution if the following set of conditions are ALL true e You are using one of the terminal tables COIT MOIT MINI TMINI TCOIT TMOIT e You are planning on using the graphic character set capabilities of the terminal e Your computer has either an EGA or VGA video graphics adapter installed Using one of the OIT character sets allows your computer to properly display the target terminal s graphic characters The normal IBM character set allows for graphic character specification but you cannot view the graphic ch
254. or invoking TERMF can be found at the end of this appendix The key codes you will need to use when defining touch points for either a GE Fanuc Touch Mini OIT Nematron 12 Touch OIT or a Lucas Deeco ST 2200 can be found in Appendix B you will use the decimal key codes Monochrome and Color OITs Nematron OptiTOUCH Terminals ONLINE operation e ANSI e NO ECHO e NOAUTOLF e NOWRAP Keyboard 1 terminal 5 for Nematron OptiTOUCH terminals e Point to point communications e SEND ANY CASE Mini and Mini Touch OIT GFK 0499 e ONLINE operation e ANSI e NO ECHO e NOAUTOLF e NOWRAP Key Codes 5 programmable for touch version 1 for non touch version e Point to point communications e SEND ANY CASE A 1 VT100 Compatible Auto repeat ON Margin bell OFF ANSI Auto XON DOFF enabled NO WRAP NO AUTO LF Lucas Deeco VT320 7B NO Lock keys NO Lock features NO New Line INTERPRET Control Characters NO Auto Wrap NO Status Lines No Local Echo XOFF at 128 NO Limit Xmit MIBM CIBM On computers using the IBM PC 83 key keyboard such as the GE Fanuc Workmaster XT compatible NUM LOCK should be OFF e You must access the PCOP software either through the Operator Interface Products Menu OI Menu or the PCOP BAT ADS BA batch file DS EXIT BUILD DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 98 ADS TERMSET CREATHLP EXIT Return to LM98 Main Menu XREF TERMF
255. ormats Select new folder translation entries eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts Database is already Up To Date If the database is not up to date the rebuilding process will begin A message will be displayed in the window indicating that the database rebuilding is in process and may take several minutes ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm WARNING changes may have been made to the system the database will not reflect these changes Do Listing For TG ae tee lee cma met ae Lit E R A a D Cross Reference Listing screens alarm pages reports alarm sources Print options data sources File operations display formats Start printout translation entries Exit eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts GFK 0499 Chapter 10 The ADS Cross Reference Utility 10 17 Section 4 Start Printout 10 18 When the Start printout option is selected the following screen is displayed ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date Print Destinati Listing Format Listing in Progress Press lt Alt P gt to Pause printing Press lt Alt A gt to Abort printing screens alarm pages reports alarm sources data sources display formats translation entries Interactive search Print options File operations Start p
256. ose the Execute Only environment by pressing the Tab key The following screen will be displayed CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL FOLDER UTILTY Have Paload fe hdir i o Byclear By hds o Press Tab Shft TAB to select DEVELOPMENT or EXECUTE ONLY CIMPLICITY 1M 90 ADS ADS Environment DEVELOPMENT or EXECUTE ONLY System Name Terminal Table Printer Table Listing of Files in ADS Folder PC NPCOPNADS PCM ADS CDF ADSB EXE ADSBM HLP ADSDEY DAT ADSDM ENU ADSDM EXE ADSE EXE ADSEXE DAT ADS_MENU ADS_MENU ENV ADS_RUN ASCII TBL CIBM TBL COIT TBL MBX ENU MBX EXE MENU EXE MIBM TBL MINI TBL MOIT TBL OIT TBL SPOOL EXE VT100 TBL ADSE ENU SPOOL ENU Total Bytes Available 5822464 Folder Size 445901 Bytes lt lt Press Enter Key to Begin ADS Installation gt gt lt EXECUTE ONLY fields default to RAM EMPTY OIT TBL ASCII TBL respectively gt lt lt Press PgUp or PgDn Key to Scroll Listing of Files gt gt C ADS_PC DEMO PCM PCM ID RACK J SLOT PLC 1D 3oy The cursor keys are used to move among the system name terminal table and printer table fields Both the system name and the terminal table fields should be filled out as shown in the table below Table 5 3 System Name and Terminal Table Selections System Terminal Terminal Name Table GE Fanuc Color OIT COIT COIT GE Fanuc Monochrome OIT MOIT MOIT GE Fanuc Mini OIT MINI MINI GE Fanuc Touch Mini OIT TMINI TMINI VT100 VT1
257. ou can press the Ctrk X key you can also press the Home key on GE Fanuc OIT terminals Typing characters into the field is accomplished in replace or overwrite mode For our example let s type the value 27 into the field 27 Feb 88 18 41 85 32 Deg F 32 212 VALUE IS xO0PENx Cstatus style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style gt eg E gt Open valve ose valve WM Deg C lt O 100 F4 0 1 F5 Cl 1 F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page F8 Close Alarm Page F9 Acknowledge Alarms F14 Options Menu The field edit is completed by pressing the Enter key The field is displayed again in normal video and we now see the value 27 in the field Also note that our bar chart is now showing a non zero reading corresponding to the value 27 and that our Degrees Fahrenheit field is showing the equivalent temperature reading of 80 27 Feb 88 18 41 58 88 Deg F C32 212 VALVE IS xOPENx Cstatus style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style gt 2 Deg C ca 18 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 51 Now let s turn our attention to our valve At first glance the display seems to be contradictory in that the valve is shown to be both open and closed However remembe
258. ough we haven t implemented anything for alarms or options yet we have created all the functionality we need for our thermometer and valve monitoring It might be a good idea to pause a moment to execute the system as it now exists before creating the rest One task remains before executing the system we must set up function key definitions for F1 and F2 for the thermometer and F4 and F5 for the valve Select the Key Assignments menu option you will be prompted for which screen you want to define the keys ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate 1 Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate B Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN BG s 58 s MAIN C 15x NUMKEYPD 9808 New screen Modify screen Screen paint Delete screen Copy screen List screens Print screen details Touch screen assignments Enter the number of the screen to modify yj Since we want to first define keys for screen 900 NUMKEYPD enter 900 in the field and press the Enter key A data entry form for screen 900 s key assignments will be opened on the screen ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Screen key assignments for NUMKEYPD C988 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 117 As you will see ordinarily we will be able to display and remove the numeric keypad screen without an
259. ould use we ll need to create one In this case we will want to create a new translation entry Selecting the Create Translation entry opens up a data entry form for a new translation entry The entry will be given the name DEGC_TO_DEGE the A term will be 1 8 the B term 0 and the C term 32 Specify Data Types will be left as N DD MMM YY HH MM SS EEE Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C CO Create a translation entry FZ edit deg Name DEGC_TO_DEGF The variables used to perform the translation are described by the following function Output Value lt A x CInput Value BD gt C A 1 800080 B i C 32 Specify Data Types Y N Input Data Type NIL Output Data Type NIL Completing the translation entry data entry form returns you to the dynamic object data entry form with the newly created translation entry referenced as the additional calculation The rest of the form is correct except that the minimum and maximum value bounds need to be changed to Fahrenheit values 32 and 212 DD MMM YY HH MM SS GEE Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Fi edit degrees F VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 999 Deg C CO 1800 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 Vieu Alarm Page Copy Dynamic Object Name DEG_F_ VALUE Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc
260. ource PLC_FAULTS Additional Calc Display Format STATUS_STRNG Display Value Y CY N Hex Notation N Left Justify Y zero Fill N Available for Edit J Display format added to system 6 130 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 6 Using the techniques for copying a dynamic object originally learned in step 10 copy the just created dynamic object PLC_FLT_STAT to the dynamic object paste buffer position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 4 44 gt and paste the dynamic object there OPTIONS MENU the PLC Fault Table the I O Fault Table XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXI Return to the main screen Copy Dynamic Object Name Data Source PLC_FAULTS Additional Calc Display Format STATUS_STRNG Display Value Y CYN Hex Notation N Left Justify Y zero Fill N Available for Edit N Fill out the dynamic object data entry form as shown on the screen below creating data source IO_FAULTS as part of the effort note that it is filled out identically to data source PLC_FAULTS except that the Source Location field should be specified as PLC_STATUS 5 PLC_STATUS 3 Note that this time when you open up the object list window with the Additional Calculation field in the data source selected you find that the needed lookup table entry STATUS_TEXT already exists Use the cursor keys to highlight it and then press the Enter ke
261. ource Screens number of per system Serial port default settings Serial port connector pin assignments C 2 Serial ports Series 90 30 Serial ports Series 90 70 Setting up the display terminal 4 1 Settings default for serial port 5 19 Setup utility description of installing on AD module 7 1 leaving saving selections software 5 9 using utility ADS setup Setup terminal A 1 Soft reset 2 5 Software setup utility Software components of 1 3 Software installation on computer Specifying host computer GFK 0499 GFK 0499 Specifying target printer 7 13 System building key functions System execution key functions System name selection T Target printer specifying Target terminal port selection selections 7 2 selections 2 Target terminal port selection 5 12 TERME E3 description of executing directly invoking A 3 running on PC 1 2 Terminal emulation mode 5 19 Terminal emulation software TERME A 3 Terminal name selection Terminal requirements p 2 Terminal setup A 1 Terminal table selections Terminals display Terminals list of Terminals using Color IBM PC Color OIT GE Fanuc Lucas Deeco ST 2200 4 10 Mini OIT Mini Touch OIT Monochrome IBM PC Monochrome OIT GE Fanuc VT100 f4 7 Terminals valid CIBM A LUDCO MIBM A mini and mini Touch orT A 1 MOIT OIT optiTOUCH A 1 VT100
262. p sancan rae tard area id dade os E T a Monochrome and Color OITs Nematron OptiTOUCH Terminals Mini and Mini Touch OFT 0 ccc een eee aT VI100 Compatibles erreren ionni niet Ee OF ede ha wheather eed Lucas Deeco u onie hhh scat Pieter E hed eee earth pe ae Rcd re etd Serial Port Pin Assignments and Cabling Diagrams 54 0555 Res 4G Ee E BEER DORs ee Ea Serial Port Pin Assignments on the Series 90 70 ADC Module Serial Port Pin Assignments on the Series 90 30 ADC Module Cabling Information me rysare pes eip e Hyi aea KR EE eens GFK 0499D CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 XI Contents AppendixD Changing Default Port Settings AppendixE Converting a Version 1 System to Version2 00005 GFK 0499D CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 XI Figure 1 1 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure C 1 Figure C 2 Figure C 3 Figure C 4 Figure C 5 Figure C 6 Figure C 7 Figure C 8 Contents Typical CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Hardware Configuration 0 0 0 e eee Series 90 70 ADC Mod le ssis yrna utente Bae esta BA Vegan Slee ote Examples of Series 90 70 ADC Module Location ina Rack 0 000 00000 Series 90 30 ADC Module s c0 hots sw hat eet be hata eae Chee series 90230 Wye Gables fit k Sh Woes Aor elated dhs eae he aig ee ha es Inserting a Mod le
263. pen up the object list window and select Create Lookup Fill out the lookup table entry data entry form as shown below Note that the custom value we have created will range between 0 and 3 as it consists of only two bits of information These values have the following meanings b1 b0 VALUE MEANING 0 0 0 No faults Table hasn t changed 0 1 1 Has faults Table hasn t changed 1 0 2 No faults Table has changed 1 1 3 Has faults Table has changed OPTIONS MENU Create a lookup table entry Uieu the P Name STATUS_TEXT View the I Input Data Type BYTE Output Data Type STRING Return to INPUT RANGE OUTPUT VALUE TABLE HAS FAULTCS gt TABLE HAS NEW FAULT NO FAULTS IN TABLE In the case of values 1 and 3 there are unique strings we want to display indicating the status of a PLC fault table containing at least 1 fault However we want to display the same string for values 0 and 2 since in both cases the PLC fault table is empty We could specify the same string twice once for the value 0 and once for 2 but it can be accomplished as shown using only a single string The ADS Executor will always process the lookup table entry from top to bottom looking for a match stopping with the first match it encounters Thus the range notation 0 255 specifies that any byte value other than 1 or 3 should get the indicated output value effectively an otherwise clause Note that unlike what we did previously with the lookup t
264. port 5 19 Demonstration system description of 6 14 development tutorial executing 5 14 5 20 list of loading in system selection of Designate print destination file name 10 10 port lpt1 com1 lpt2 com2 file 10 10 Destination print 10 10 Development environment customizing Development environment options builder database printing executor fault table module 5 online help pid module 7 5 print spooler Development tutorial description of 6 non touch terminals touch terminals Development version selections Downloading CIMPLICITY 90 A DS soft ware Drawer definition of E Environments ADS 7 3 Execute only environment Execute only environment options fault table module 7 6 pid module 7 7 print spooler Exe a i environment customizing 7 6 Execute only version selections Executing TERMF directly A 3 Executor option 7 5 External interface 1 1 F Fault table module 7 5 7 6 Features of ADS system File operations 10 15 zi terminal connection and set up directory of systems load new database rebuild database select new folder Folder definition Folders managing G Getting started Series 90 30 users GFK 0499 GFK 0499 Getting started Series 90 70 users H Hard reset p 5 Hardware cabling C 3 installing the ADC module 2 2 LEDs 2 4 requirements Series 90 30 B 2 requirements Ser
265. ptions Menu Pressing the F14 returns you to the main screen 29 Feb 88 20 52 35 32 Deg F 32 212 VALVE IS xOPENx Cstatus style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 4 Deg C lt O 100 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C F7 View Alarm Page F8 Close Alarm Page F9 Acknowledge Alarms F14 Options Menu GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 71 Beware of Rounding Errors When you are using scaling with a dynamic object which you then edit the scaling is applied in reverse such that the value is sent to the PLC with the proper units This conversion can lead to rounding errors which can result in a display being slightly different than what you expected For example our temperature value was defined to be in units of degrees Celsius In one case we display the equivalent temperature value in degrees Fahrenheit and also allow you to edit that value Assume that the operator edits the degrees Fahrenheit temperature entering a value of 75 29 Feb 88 20 53 47 Deg F 32 212 VALUE IS xO0PENx Cstatus style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style gt 4 Deg C lt O 100 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu After pressing the Enter key the value is converted to degrees Celsius before being stored in the defined memor
266. r MS DOS sub directory ADS_PC lt systemname gt PCM If the optional PATH field is filled in it must be filled in with the complete MS DOS directory path where the system is to be created or located A discussion of folders is given below Alternatively you may create access a system by specifying ADSBUILD lt system name gt lt source folder path gt at the MS DOS prompt where lt system name gt and the optional lt source folder path gt are as described above For example to create the system NEW in the standard folder ADS_PC NEWCM you would specify ADSBUILD NEW In either case the ADS Builder will be executed After pressing the Enter key when viewing the copyright screen the following will be displayed on the computer screen ADS BUILDER Current System Name NEW Terminal MPC CCONZ gt Default Scan Rate 1 68 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 1 60 s Dir ADS_PC NEW PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Configuration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Load Save operations Print system summary Options PID Terminal Exit Note thatthe folder ADS_PC NEW PCM was created automatically also note that the base folder name is the same as the system name
267. r copyright 1988 1989 GE Fanuc Press ALT Z keys to return to programmer main menu 6 8 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 2 The Development Tutorial Overview of Product Operation When producing an operator interface with the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software for a particular application you will typically go through the following steps note that steps 2 through 6 may be performed in any order one or more of those steps not performed at all or one or more of them performed multiple times 1 2 Run the ADS Builder Use the system Configuration Operations to perform the following Name the system and set certain parameters Create data sources Series 90 memory locations Create display formats custom displays of Series 90 data Create translation tables linear data scaling and offsetting Create lookup tables non linear data scaling and conversions Create engineering units conversion tables linear data scaling Create command scripts integral sequence of commands Use the Screen Operations to create screens and assign actions to the user defined keys for each screen se the Alarm Operations to create alarm sources and alarm pages U Use the Report Operations to create printable reports U se the Load Save Operations to save the system to disk and to the ADC execute the system on the ADC Exit the ADS Builder Going Through the Tuto
268. r the object list Choose to create a new display format filling out the resulting data entry form as shown below DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style Cannunciator style Create a display format OFF_ON Data Type STATE Range Action OFF NORMAL ON Pressing the Alt F10 key completes the definition of display format OFF_ON and returns you to the dynamic object s data entry form This time we will leave the Display Value field in the form set to N as we are not actually displaying a value instead we are only affecting video attributes This situation where a display format is controlling the video attributes assigned to a static string of text on the screen is the only situation where the Display Value field is set to N otherwise it should always be set to Y DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F C32 212 Edit degrees F VALVE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style TT Rao Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE 999 Deg C CG Create Dynamic Object Edit degree UALUE_ANNUN Data Source VALUE Additional Calc Display Format OFF_ON Display Value Y N Display format added to system Pressing the Enter key completes the dynamic object data entry form GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 109 Defining the Touch Points Now that we have completed animating the main screen we now need to act
269. r command scripts Choose to create a new script resulting in a command script data entry form being opened up on the screen Fill it out as shown below ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name LATCHED Source Data Type STATE PLC Location Z2 Create a command script Name LATCHED_CMDS PLCSETWC2Z1 168 LOGTTMCLook at bar chart Enter ONE valid command per line GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 137 6 138 A command script is used to specify a sequence of commands which will be executed when an alarm range evaluates true or by a particular function key being pressed to which the script is attached One command script can call another meaning that a very long sequence of commands triggered by a single event is possible In this example the first command will write the word value 100 to location Z1 which just happens to be the location we are using to monitor our temperature reading The second command will display the text string Look at bar chart at the bottom of the target terminal s display After completing the command script you are returned to the alarm source data entry form Change the Text field to read Latched example and set the Latched flag to Y Sour Addi Range Text Range ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name LATCHED ce Data Type STATE PLC Location 2Z2 6 Scan Rate tional Calc
270. r details on using the Operator Interface Products menu EXIT DER Digital Event Recorder ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 90 ADS EXIT Return to LM90 Main Menu lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 62 To enter the ADS Setup Utility from the MS DOS prompt type the following command ADSSETUP By default the ADS Setup Utility assumes that you will be using a computer with a monochrome display as the host computer If your computer has a color display and you want to view the Setup Utility in color the first time you enter it type the following command at the MS DOS prompt ADSSETUP COLOR 7 1 The following screen will be displayed on your computer s display CIMPLICITY Ctm gt 90 ADS Setup Utility l Version 4 61 DEVELOPMENT VERSION SELECTIONS EXECUTE ONLY VERSION SELECTIONS Menu 78672 Executor 246144 Builder 257648 Fault Table Module 93136 Executor 199248 Max System Cbhytes 293312 Max System Cbytes 97632 Development Version Selections Execute Only Version Selections Page Z Selections Leave Setup PAGE 1 OF Z You will see five different categories of setup information on the screen organized on two screen pages development version selections execute on
271. r that the second valve display is a fixed string that will be shown in normal video when the valve is actually open and in reverse video when closed Thus both displays are really telling us the same thing Press the F5 key to close the valve observing the changes made to the display on the screen 2 Feb 88 18 52 14 88 Deg F C32 212 VALVE IS CLOSED Cstatus style Fi edit degrees F Ta Rae Cannunciator style gt 2 Deg C ca 10 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu Since we have now verified that the basic components of our system are functioning let s go back and complete the remainder of our system Press the F15 key to exit the system Depending on what target terminal you have selected you may not see the exiting messages shown below However you should see the gt characters displayed on your computer screen These characters indicate that the ADC module is now hard reset ADS EXECUTOR exiting DATA MANAGER exiting gt 6 52 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 To return to the Builder s Load Save operations menu press the Alt Z key ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal COIT lt C0M1 gt Default Scan Rate B8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Prin
272. r which supports two ports One port has a fixed interface Any application using port 1 must use the RS 232 interface The Port 2 interface is selectable for either RS 232 or RS 485 The connector pin assignments for the Series 90 30 ADC are shown below a44357 SHIELD RS 232 TD PORT 2 PORT 1 RS 232 TD RS 232 CTS PORT 2 PORT 1 RS 232 RD RS 232 RD PORT 2 PORT 1 RS 232 RTS RS 232 DTR PORT 2 PORT 1 RS 232 CTS RS 232 DCD PORT 2 NO CONNECTION RS 232 RTS PORT 2 SIGNAL GROUND 4 RS 232 DTR PORT1 PORT 1 RS 232 DCD RS 485 SD B PORT 2 PORT 2 RS 485 SD A RS 485 RTS B PORT 2 PORT 2 RS 485 RTS A RS 485 CTS B PORT 2 PORT 2 RS 485 CTS A TERMINATION RD PORT 2 PORT 2 TERMINATION CTS O O OOOOOOOHOO 7 RS 485 RD B PORT 2 GO 2909 OO OE PORT 2 RS 485 RD A Q Figure C 2 Serial Port Pin Assignments for the Series 90 30 ADC C 2 CIMPLICITY 901 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Cabling Information GFK 0499 Several prewired cables are available from GE Fanuc which can be used with your CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Operator Interface System The prewired cables shown in the following three illustrations provide the required signal connections between the RS 232 serial port on an ADC and a serial port on the computer
273. rch 1994 GFK 0499 Keyboard Key Click YES Auto Repeat OFF These are the suggested settings most users should find them optimal Communications Local Echo OFF XMIT Baud 19200 RECV Baud 19200 Data Bits 8 Parity NONE Stop Bits 1 XON XOFF XOFF AT 128 IO TYPE RS232 DATA Limit XMIT NO These match the ADC module default settings Connect the Lucas Deeco ST2200 to the ADC module Use the IC690CBL705 cable supplied with your CIMPLICITY 90 ADS package Connect the female end of the cable to the serial port on the back of the ST2200 then connect the other male end of the cable to port 2 bottom connector on the ADC module If you are using the IC690CBL705 cable to connect your computer to port 1 of the ADC module you either must order another of the same cable to connect to your ST2200 or make your own equivalent cable If you are making your own cable the applicable wiring diagrams are provided in Appendix B This completes the installation of your terminal Go on to Chapter 5 which tells you how to copy the ADS software onto your computer and how to install it on your ADS module s Chapter 4 Setting Up and Connecting the Display Terminal 4 11 Chapter Installing the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS 5 Software Now that you have the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor ADC module installed in the PLC and configured in Logicmaster 90 software the next step is to install the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software onto your compu
274. ress the Alt F1 key note that the Re designator disappears from the status area Alternatively you can press the F1 key to select the video attributes menu and then select the choice of Reverse again This will also cause the reverse video choice to be toggled off The difference between the two approaches is that the Alt F1 key will remove ALL selected video attributes 6 22 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Editing Screen Text Using the cursor keys to position the cursor at the appropriate lt row column gt positions given in the table below enter the specified text at the indicated screen positions Note that the sequence of eight X s in the text VALVE IS XXXXXXXX must be in upper case Also the text strings DD MMM YY and HH MM SS must be in upper case lt R ow Column gt Text to Type There lt 4 26 gt 100 lt 4 61 gt DD MMM YY lt 4 72 gt HH MM SS lt 6 1 gt 999 Deg F 32 212 lt 6 42 gt VALVEISXXXXXXXX status style lt 7 2 gt F1 edit degrees F lt 7 27 gt D lt 8 27 gt E lt 8 42 gt VALVE IS CLOSED annunciator style lt 9 27 gt G lt 10 1 gt 999 Deg C 0 100 lt 10 48 gt F4 Open valve F5 Close valve lt 11 2 gt F2 edit degrees C lt 11 27 gt C lt 12 55 gt F7 View Alarm Page lt 13 55 gt F8 Close Alarm Page lt 14 28 gt 0 lt 14 55 gt F9 AcknowledgeAlarms
275. rial GFK 0499 The tutorial is presented as a series of steps which represent the typical sequence you will follow in creating any system You will build a non trivial system and execute it on an ADC module using your target terminal After you have completed the tutorial you will have been introduced to the following product concepts and features Use the ADS Builder to create and modify a system Use the ADS Builder to save a system to the ADC module Create screens Edit screen text Control video attributes and the size of the text Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 9 6 10 e draw rectangles e Select regions on a screen Create dynamic objects Create bar charts Copy dynamic objects Create data sources Create linear translations e Create display formats Create lookup tables Define function keys e Create a custom location based on multiple PLC locations Create an alarm page Create an alarm source e Use the Executor to execute a system e View real time data on multiple screens in multiple formats e Edita value ona screen Seta PLC location to a new value e Display multiple screens simultaneously Look at PLC status information e Access the Fault option module e Display an alarm page Acknowledge alarms For detailed information on what will be covered in general during the tutorial refer to the later chapters in this manual and to GFK 0641
276. rintout Exit eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts Print Destinati Listing Format Printing xrefs for screens If lt Alt P gt is pressed to cause the listing to pause the following screen will be displayed ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date Listing paused Press lt Alt C gt to continue listing Press lt Alt P gt to Pause printing Press lt Alt A gt to Abort printing screens alarm pages reports alarm sources data sources display formats translation entries Interactive search Print options File operations Start printout Exit eng units conversions lookup table entries command scripts Printing xrefs for screens CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Printing of the listing can be resumed by pressing lt Alt C gt or you can press lt ALT A gt to abort printing If you select to abort the printing the following screen will be displayed with a message ind icating that the listing has aborted ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date Print Destinati Listing Format Listing Aborted lt press any key to continue gt Press lt Alt P gt to Pause printing Press lt Alt A gt to Abort printing screens alarm pages
277. rm source copy The Text field is changed to read Auto ack example and the Auto ack flag is changed to Y By default an entry in an alarm page will be shown blinking when it occurs When an operator acknowledges the alarm it will be shown steady In addition if the alarm source is no longer in alarm the entry will be removed from the alarm page following its acknowledgement You should set the Auto ack flag to Y for any alarms that you do not want an operator to have to explicitly acknowledge ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name AUTO_ACK Source Data Type STATE PLC Location Z2 6 Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC gt Additional Calc Range ON Action Text Auto ack example Range Action Text Range Action Text Range Action Text Log N Timestamp Y Latched N Notify N Auto ack E Output text to following alarm pages 71 Make another copy of alarm source UNLATCHED this time giving it a name of LATCHED Select the first Action field and press the Alt S key to open up the object list for command scripts Choose to create a new script resulting ina command script data entry form being opened up on the screen Fill it out as shown below ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name LATCHED Source Data Type STATE PLC Location Z2 6 Create a command script Name LATCHED_CMDS PLCSETWC2Z1 108 LOGTTMCLook at bar chart Enter ONE valid command per line
278. rminal the size supported by the touch point grid but you can in effect create larger touch point areas This can be done by assigning the same key code value to adjacent touch point areas DD MM Y Y H MM SS 999 Deg F C32 212 Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE 999 Deg C CO 100 UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE ALARMS The first touch point area you want to activate is the three consecutive touch point areas in which the text Edit degrees F appears Press the Enter key until you reach the 6 110 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 leftmost touch area in the second row of touch points To cause an action to occur you will need the touch point area to return the key code of a function key In looking at appendix B we see that function keys F1 through F15 are designated by the decimal key codes 128 through 142 We choose to use function key F1 in this case so we enter the same key code value 128 into the three consecutive touch point areas DD MM YY H MM SS 999 Deg F 32 21 122R 221 28 VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style t H OPEN VALVE 999 Deg C CA 1800 gt UIEW CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS
279. roup separator caret RS record separator underscore US unit separator exclamationpoint double quotationmark hatch number sign or pound dollarsign percentsign ampersand apostrophe or single right quote left or open parenthesis right or close parenthesis asterisk or star plussign comma minus sign hyphen or dash period or dot slash or forwardslash zero colon semicolon less than equals greater than questionmark atsign begin uppercase letters B 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 Decimal 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 8 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 11 11 11 11 11 11 ajl AIS N ejo Hex Character 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 Ol e 6 gt Cl N ol mi afafa al al af OT af af Aaf al OCT al af Af BY BP BY BT BT e JIa wo Ol ga wj N e 4 5 7 A C mij m j N wo Description end uppercase letters left or open bracket backslash orreverse slash right or close square bracket up arrow sign or caret underscore grave accent or single left quote begin lowercase letters Appendix B ASCII Codes B 3 B 4 Decimal Hex Character Description 122 end lowercase letters 123 left or open squiggly brace a
280. rst Screen 0000005 8 5 GFK 0499D CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 x Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Appendix A Appendix C Contents Section 4 Executing The System You Have Built Keeping Your System On The RAM Drive 0 0 e eee eee eee Keeping Your System On The PC Drive 6 0666 c cece eee eee The ADS Help Utility icc ceacsisideeotnoraee acveats doses anes The ADS Cross Reference Utility 0 cee cece ee eee Section 1 Running the Adsxref Utility 6 Command Line Flags eee Section 2 Print OPtOns soss cs etek ca etogss ace Siees eseas Printer Setups rrenen ws etn a Rina dee God E een nae Rhee es Designate Print Destination 6 66 eens PID Listing Option eet Ween ia Gee he Ane a is Xref Listing Options eee a Write Print Options to File 2 2 0 eee eee Section 3 File Operations 0 cee cee cece eee eens Load New Database i excxs2d 2 400 ra Er tna ab Bete set ha an ed eee Directory Of SYSteMs seine See eed ea CER L eee eld wen Select New Folder so 22c8 04 ved hab oan tae eet e Sak Bled eek a Rebuild Database emaa cece ence nen e nee Section 4 Start Printout 0 ccc ccc cece ee eens Section 5 Exdte iis a aE a elena Gte eae Seat lee Ne aaa os The Operator Interface Products Menu 0 eee eee Terminal Setu
281. rt Row 1 Rows 23 Start Column 1 Columns 80 Image N CNorm Rev Trans gt Foreground WHITE Background BLACK nnm Enter a screen name of MAIN and a screen number of 1 The start row rows start column columns and image fields may all be left as their defaults If you are using a color terminal you may want to change the foreground and background colors to something other than the white on black default Press the Enter key to complete or skip a field on the data entry form ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal COIT lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate 1 Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate a Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN BG s 58 s Create Screen en Name MAIN Number 1 art Row 1 Rows 23 Column 1 Columns 808 Image N CNorm Rev Trans gt Magenta eground WHITE kground BLACK GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 19 Upon completing the create screen data entry form you will automatically be placed into the screen painter for screen 1 Text Static 6 20 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Video Attributes and Double Size Text The dashed line towards the bottom of the screen indicates the lower bound of the screen area for your target terminal Th
282. ry about with the refresh system approach GFK 0499 Chapter 8 ADS Off Line PC BasedBuilder 8 9 Chapter GFK 0499 9 The ADS Help Utility To make your ADS operator interface systems easier to use you can add comprehensive context sensitive on line help entries Up to 999 separate help entries can be defined although the total size of the resulting help file must fit within 32 768 bytes of memory Each entry or index is accessed by executing the HELP command see Chapter 3 Section 6 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference Manual specifying the particular help screen to be displayed Both multi page and multi threaded help screen organization is available as described below Any text editor which produces normal ASCII files can be used to create the help text for your ADS operator interface system The file containing the text should be named lt system gt HEL where lt system gt is the name of your ADS operator interface system see Chapter 3 Section 1 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference Manual for restrictions on naming your system A sample ADS help text file is shown below 10 ADS Help Facility Explained Up to 999 Help indices may be defined for a single system Thes indices function as entry points to one or more help screens which serve to provide the user with helpful information The syntax for specifying a help index is S lt index gt lt title gt where lt index gt is a value between 1 and 999
283. s Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts MEE E A EEEE Default Alarm Scan rate TUTOR Default Scan Rate Default Alarm Scan Rate Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Modify System Params System Name TUTOR Terminal COIT Terminal Device Printer Device NULL Default Scan rate 1 68 1 66 Startup screen Once the Modify System Parameters data entry form has been closed press the Esc key to return to the Builder main menu Note that the changes you made to the form are now reflected in the status information on the screen ADS BUILDER Current System Name COIT cCON2 gt CNULL gt ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Terminal Printer Dir Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts 8 a 8 8 a 8 8 a 8 8 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System TUTOR Default Scan Rate 1 Default Alarm Scan Rate B Startup Screen ADS Print Destination BG s 58 s STDPRN Configuration operations Screen operations Alarm operations Report operations Load Save operations Print system summary Options PID Terminal Exit 6 18 Creating the Main Screen Now that you have selected the correct target terminal for your configuration you may proceed to create your first screen Sel
284. s menu You will be prompted as to whether the configuration changes in the work space should be saved in the standard configuration file UCDECDE Answer yes to this prompt by pressing the Y key CONFIG MB TERMF STATUS CTL FOLDER UTILTY 3 4 5 stask 2 6 Econmntftread write Mstndrd Save changes made to the configuration data Y N Edit Programmer Communications and File Server Data Edit Annotation Describing the Configuration Data Read Configuration Data from a File Write Configuration Data to a File Access Standard Menu Items File Read PC PCOPNADS PCMNADS CDF ONL INE FACTORY C ADS_PCNTEST PCM ODIFIED RACK J SLOT A PLC ID INSERT PCM ID From this point press the F9 key to enter the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS installation screen Follow the instructions in Chapter 5 for how to install ADS on the ADC module The new serial port settings will be stored to the ADC module during the process Note If you need to restore the default configuration file type in the following command at the MS DOS prompt COPY PCOP BAT ADS_CDDRC COP ADS PCM ADS CDF Using TERMSET Two different communications configuration files can be used with the ADS software thedefaultfile PCOP BAT ADS_TERM IAT which will suffice for most users and a specialuserfile PCOP BAT ADS_USERDAT which is typically used to handle a slow printer connected to port 1 of the ADC There are three changes you may n
285. s set to N the cross references will not be included in the listing The remaining items determine which ADS system parameters cross reference information will be included If Cross References Listing is set to N none of these items will be accessible Write Print Options to File 10 12 When the Write print options to file option is selected a data entry window is opened containing one field which can be set by the user ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcem Database Status Up To Date WRITE PRINT OPTIONS TO FILE Print Destination Listing Format Do you want to save the current print options to file Y N screens 42 alarm pages 9 reports 0 alarm sources 32 Printer setup data sources 77 Designate print destination display formats 14 System listing options translation entries 2 PID listing option eng units conversions 0 Xref listing options lookup table entries 13 Write print options to file command scripts 100 The selections for this option are Y or N If you enter Y the current settings of all print options will be saved in the environment file These settings will become the new settings CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 You can save the current print options to file The print options are saved to the environment file and are the options that will be used everytime a listing is printed
286. s shown below ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Screen key assignments for OPTIONS lt 100 gt PLC_FAULTC gt 10_FAULTC gt POPSCNC108 gt EXITO bo The key assignment for function key F1 PLC_FAULT indicates that the PLC fault table screen should be accessed This will be possible at runtime only if you selected the Fault Module option with the ADSSETUP Utility and subsequently installed it on the ADC module utilizing PCOP An optional foreground and background color specification may be specified within the parentheses CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Function key F2 performs the same function as described for function key F1 above except access is provided to the I O fault table ADS supports the concept of multiple screens being displayed on the screen simultaneously Each of these screens will have its own set of function key assignments The last screen displayed on the target terminal will be the one whose function keys are active Because of this we need to provide a mechanism for removing the OPTIONS screen from the terminal reactivating the MAIN screen s function keys This is accomplished by the POPSCN 100 command assigned to function key F14 The EXIT command assigned to function key F15 performs the same function as did its assignment to function key F14 on the main screen The Enter key is used to complete the key assignments
287. s turned off Connect an IBM XT compatible keyboard to the applicable connector on the back of your OIT Note that the keyboard may have either DIN or phone jack style connector Many IBM AT compatible keyboards have a switch which allows it to perform as an XT style keyboard One such keyboard is the GE Fanuc Cimstar keyboard IC642PKB250B B Revision or later only not the A Revision Turn on the OIT Press the Ctrl 1 keys press and hold Ctrl then press 1 on the attached keyboard The OIT Configuration Menu will be displayed on the screen Note that for the IC600KD53X terminals only you must press the F7 function key when the Main Menu is displayed to select the Configuration Menu 4 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 Fill in the Configuration Menu as follows Firmware Release X X 27FEB91 MODE ONLINE ANSI NO ECHO SEND ANY CASE DATE TIME 27FEB91 NO DISPLAY 14 51 NO DISPLAY END LINE COLOR NO WRAP NO AUTO LF COLOR CURSOR SCREEN NO CURSOR CRT SAVER OFF STATUS CONTROLS ONE PRINT SCREEN KEY OFF GENERIC ASCII PORT 1 EYBOARD ONE PORT 1 19 2K NONE 8 BIT 1 STOP SOFT PT TO PT PORT 2 19 2K NONE 7 BIT 1 STOP HARD PT TO PT PORT 3 19 2K NONE 7 BIT 1 STOP NONE CONFIGURATION SAVE CONFIDENCE TESTS DIAGNOSTIC EXTENDED MEMORY SAVE SCREENS 00 TO SCREENS UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT SELECT PERFORM UP KEY DOWN KEY LEFT KEY RIGHT KEY HOME ENTER MAIN SAVE RECALL
288. se to indicate your choice s to the installation program Table 5 1 Specifying Demonstration Systems to View ALL NONE COIT MOIT MINI TMINI VT100 CIBM MIBM TCOIT TMOIT LUDCO Keyword Demonstration System Copied Copyall seven demonstration systems Don t copy any of the demonstration systems Copy the demonstration system for the GE Fanuc color OIT Copy the demonstration system for the GE Fanuc monochrome OIT Copy the demonstration system for the GE Fanuc mini OIT Copy the demonstration system for the GE Fanuc touch mini OIT Copy the demonstration system for the VT100 compatible Copy the demonstration system for the color IBM PC compatible Copy the demonstration system for the monochrome IBM PC compatible Copy the demonstration system for the Nematron color OptiTOUCH Copy the demonstration system for the Nematron monochrome OptiTOUCH Copy the demonstration system for the Lucas Deeco ST 2200 For example to copy the ADS software to hard disk drive C along with all the demonstration systems type the following at the MS DOS prompt A INSTALL C ALL To copy the ADS software to hard disk drive C along with the demonstration systems for the GE Fanuc color OIT the GE Fanuc touch mini OIT and the color IBM PC compatible computer type the following at the MS DOS prompt A INSTALL C COIT TMINI CIBM Regardless of your choice of demonstration systems the hard drive you specify should be the same as t
289. sing the appropriate key 4 Keys marked as GOLD xxx refer to the two key sequence of the GOLD key followed by the appropriate key GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 11 Table 6 2 Key Functions for System Execution Terminal TMOIT TCOIT VT100 MIBM CIBM Exitsystem execution AE AE AE Clearfield X or Home X X Refresh screen W W W User defined function key AK1 F1 KP1 Fl or KP1 User defined function key AK2 F2 KP2 F2 or KP2 User defined function key AK3 F3 KP3 F3 or KP3 User defined function key AK4 F4 KP4 F4 or KP4 User defined function key AK5 F5 KP5 F5 or KP5 User defined function key AK6 F6 KP6 F6 or KP6 User defined function key AK7 F7 KP7 F7 or KP7 User defined function key AK8 F8 KP8 F8 or KP8 User defined function key AK9 F9 KP9 F9 or KP9 User defined function key AK10 F10 KPO F10 or KPO User defined function key AK11 F11 PF1 F11 or Insert User defined function key AK12 F12 PF2 F12 or Home User defined function key AK13 F13 PF3 F13 or Delete User defined function key AK14 F14 PF4 F14 or End User defined function key AK15 F15 KPENTER F15 or KP Num Lock must be set to OFF for 83 key keyboard F11 and F12 keys on enhanced AT and PS 2style keyboards cannot be used user SHIFT F1 and SHIFT F2 For those keyboards which only support function keys F1 through F10 F11 through F15 may be generated by pressing SHIFT F1 through SHIFT F5 Keys marked as
290. sition the cursor at the appropriate lt row column gt positions shown in the table below enter the specified text at the indicated screen positions Note that the sequence of eight X s in the text VALVE IS XXXXXXXX must be in upper case Also the text strings DD MMM YY and HH MM SS must be in upper case 6 86 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 lt Row Column gt Text to Type There lt 4 26 gt lt 4 61 gt lt 4 72 gt lt 5 3 gt lt 6 5 gt lt 6 42 gt lt 7 27 gt lt 7 42 gt lt 8 27 gt lt 9 27 gt lt 10 44 gt lt 10 67 gt lt 11 27 gt lt 13 3 gt lt 13 42 gt lt 13 50 gt lt 13 59 gt lt 13 73 gt lt 14 5 gt lt 14 28 gt lt 14 42 gt lt 14 50 gt lt 14 59 gt lt 14 75 gt lt 15 43 gt lt 15 51 gt lt 15 58 gt 999 Deg F C32 212 Edit degrees F 100 gt Edit degrees C 999 Deg C CB Rou E GFK 0499 Col Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 100 DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 Edit Degrees F VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style D VALVE IS CLOSED annunciator style E G OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE C 999 Deg C 0 100 VIEW CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit Degrees C 0 ALARM ALARM ALL MENU PAGE PAGE ALARMS DD MM YY H MM SS VALUE IS XXXXXXXX status style VALVE IS CLOSED Cannunc
291. splay System Reference Manual Chapter 3 Configuration Operations for a complete list of supported terminals and for information on changing any of the other system parameter settings CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 4 Executing The System You Have Built Keeping Your System On The RAM Drive GFK 0499 The easiest way to use the PC based Builder in conjunction with executing the system on the target terminal for check out is to keep the system on the ADC module s RAM drive refreshing it with changes made while in the PC based Builder When the system is completed it will already reside on the ADC module so the computer only needs to be disconnected from the module unless the computer is being used as the target terminal The general steps to follow in building a system in this manner are listed below Note that the following steps assume that you have followed the development tutorial in Chapter 6 so that you have a general knowledge of the Builder functionality You may also need to refer to the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference Manual GFK 0641 for specific information 1 Hard reset the ADC module Ifa different system currently resides on the ADC module s hard disk ensure that you have an archived copy of it and then delete it from the ADC module using PCOP 2 Use the ADS Setup Utility see Chapter 7 to select the options for the execute only environment the
292. status word which is actually a collection of 16 bit STATE flags of status information The left portion of the definition PLC_STATUS 4 indicates that bit b4 the fifth bit of the status word should be accessed Similarly PLC_STATUS 2 indicates that 6 128 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 6 bit b2 the third bit of the status word should be accessed Bit b4 indicates whether there are any faults in the PLC fault table and bit b2 indicates if there has been a change to the PLC fault table since the last time you looked at it Using the semicolon character between the two single bit specifications serves to tie these two locations together to form a new custom value Here a BYTE type has been chosen The leftmost specification PLC_STATUS 4 becomes the least significant bit bit b0 of the byte and the rightmost specification PLC_STATUS 2 becomes bit b1 Bits b2 through b7 are automatically set to 0 to fill out the remainder of the byte Select the Additional Calculation field for data source PLC_FAULIS press the Alt S key to open up the object list window and select Create Lookup Fill out the lookup table entry data entry form as shown below Note that the custom value we have created will range between 0 and 3 as it consists of only two bits of information These values have the following meanings b1 b0 VALUE MEANING 0 0 0 No faults T
293. stem 6 123 First let s see if we can get the mercury to rise in our thermometer Press the Edit degrees C touch area to begin a field edit of the Degrees Celsius value After you press the touch area you should see a numeric keypad displayed on the right hand side of the display and the entire field displayed in reverse video and the 0 initially displayed in the field should be blinking If you want to clear the contents of the field you may press the CLEAR button on the numeric keypad If you want to cancel the operation you will need to press the CAN button twice Inputting characters into the field is accomplished in replace or overwrite mode For our example let s input the value 27 into the field by pressing the appropriate buttons on the keypad TUTOR AN ADS DEMONS TUTOR SS AN ADS ans C CJ E CLEAR 188 32 Deg F 32 212 alii OBS VALVE E tam Deg C CO 100 gt UIEW Edit degrees C ALARM Es PAGE E N T E R The field edit is completed by pressing the ENTER button on the keypad The numeric keypad will be removed from the display the field is displayed again in normal video and we now see the value 27 in the field Also note that our bar chart is now showing a non zero reading corresponding to the value 27 and that our Degrees Fahrenheit field is showing the equivalent temperature reading of 80 3 Apr 88 23 38 31 8 Deg F C32 212 Ed
294. stem to Modify current Refresh system i Execute system i Clear system Print destination DreDDeNADODON Select the Save System to Disk menu item Your system will be saved to your computer s hard disk one file at a time As each file is saved its name will be listed on the message line at the bottom of your computer screen After all files are saved a System save complete message will be displayed ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate B8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Load system Modify current directory Refresh system in RAM Execute system in RAM Clear system Print destination QOrPOrPFNDROAOAN System save complete GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 121 Copying the System to the ADC Module Now that the system has been saved to disk it may be copied to the ADCs RAM disk If you attempt to copy the system to the ADC module when it has not been saved to disk you will be warned of this fact and prompted to confirm that the copy should continue The copy is accomplished by selecting the Refresh system in RAM menu option Th
295. stem_path gt is the optional complete path specification for where the ADS system may be found If the lt system_path gt specification is not provided the system is expected to be found in a PCM folder of the same name as the system beneath the ADS_PC directory Command Line Flags Once you become familiar with using the Adsxref Utility there are some command line flags that you may specify to disable certain events and or change the terminal type Following is a description of each of these flags and their valid settings Note When specifying one or more flags from the command line the system path MUST also be specified The command line parameters are not case sensitive T C M This flag is used to select the type of terminal being used B Y N This flag enables disables the prompt for building a nonexistent database R Y N This flag enables disables the prompt for rebuilding a database that exists but is not up to date 10 2 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 T Flag The first time the Adsxref Utility is started up the type of terminal being used i e monochrome or color is automatically detected The setting of this flag is stored in an environment file Note Some PCs are equipped with a CGA or VGA adapter and a terminal that displays shades instead of colors In this particular setup some of the screens in the Adsxref Utility may look odd in which c
296. ster 90 software on your computer and enter the Logicmaster 90 30 Configuration package Choose F1 to enter I O Configuration A setup screen representing the modules in a baseplate will be displayed The following example screen represents a sample Series 90 30 PLC system CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 Z COPY REF VU DELETE UNDEL IERO GONS SE CS SO oe RACK J 5 IAMS YAI CPU331 ADC311 CHM301 MDL240 8 MHZ ADC GENCOM I AC16 RefAdr 10001 Ft tt tt yt OFFLINE NFOLDERS MAN_30 PRG MAN_30 CONFIG VALID IREPLACE STEP 3 Move the cursor to the slot where you have an ADC module installed STEP 4 Press F8 other STEP 5 Press F4 oi This abbreviation stands for Operator Interface STEP 6 Choose IC693ADC311 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Coprocessor Depending on your version of Logicmaster 90 30 software the module name may be Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor or Access 90 Display Coprocessor however the catalog number will always be IC693ADC311 Note Repeat steps 3 4 5 and 6 for each ADC module you have installed STEP 7 Press the ESC key to exit this screen This will also automatically save this configuration to disk Note You Do NOT have the ability to zoom into this module all module configuration will be downloaded with the ADS software This is discussed later in this chapter Chapter 3 Gett
297. t see the label inside of the module s door Series 90 30 PLC User s PORT 1 is labeled on the T end of the Wye cable see the figure on page 3 5 in this manual Select one of the cables listed in the table below All 3 of these cables are included in your CIMPLICITY 90 ADS system package If Your Computer is You Use This Cable AGE Fanuc Workmaster II oran IBM PS 2 IC690CBL705 ADC PCMtoWorkmaster II AGE Fanuc Workmaster or an IBM PC XT IC690CBL701 ADC PCMtoWorkmaster An IBM PC AT personal computer IC690CBL702 ADC PCMtoPC AT Make sure that the power is ON to your PLC Hard reset the ADC module by pressing the Reset Restart pushbutton on the front of the module continuously for more than 5 seconds CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 From the Operator Interface Products Menu OI_MENU pull down the ADS menu and select the option PCOP ADS OE EXIT BUILD DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITYCtm gt 98 ADS TERMSET CREATHLP EXIT Return to LM9 Main Menu XREF TERMF lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press CHome for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 62 The following screen will be displayed GE F
298. t we have created all the functionality we need for our thermometer and valve monitoring It might be a good idea to pause a moment to execute the system as it now exists before creating the rest One task remains before executing the system we must set up function key definitions for F1 and F2 for the thermometer and F4 and F5 for the valve 999 Deg F 32 212 Fi edit degrees F 999 Deg C lt A 100 F2 edit degrees C DD MMM YY HH MM SS VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style F4 Open valve F5 Close valve View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu To exit the screen painter saving the work that you ve already done press the Alt F10 key Should you ever want to exit the screen painter and throw away the work you ve done pressing the F10 key acts as a Quit You will be return to the screen menu options ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal COIT lt C0M2 gt Printer CNULL gt Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Screens MAIN C Dx Default Scan Rate 1 Default Alarm Scan Rate B Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN BG s 58 s New screen Modify screen Screen paint Delete screen Copy screen List screens Print screen details 6 44 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Select the Key Assignments menu option you will be prompted for w
299. t Destination STDPRN Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Load system Save system to disk Modify current directory Refresh system in RAM Clear system Print destination QOrOrPFNADOORF Creating the Options Screen Use the Esc key to return to the Builder s main menu and from there select the Screen Operations menu Execute the New Screen option and fill out the screen s data entry form per the following Note that this new screen will not cover the full extent of the screen as did the main screen screen 1 ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal COIT lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate B8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN Cc D Create Screen Screen Name OPTIONS Screen Number 188 Start Row 5 Rows 18 Start Column 6 Columns 70 Image fj CNorm Rev Trans Foreground WHITE Background BLACK Press the Enter key to enter the screen painter GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 53 Using the technique described in step 6 for drawing rectangles draw a rectangle around the outer edges of the screen Note that if you press the Insert key before pressing a cursor key the result is go to
300. t Included Included Included Print Spooler Fault Table Module PID Module Loop Setup Screen Not Included Not Included PAGE 1 OF Z In this dialog box you will have the option of Including or Not Including each of the optional components All components with the exception of the Executor are optional for the execute only environment The Print Spooler option is used to output text to a printer You will want to select it if you intend to log alarms or print reports to a printer when your ADS operator interface system is executed via the Executor see above See Chapter 13 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference manual GFK 0641 for more details on the operation of the Print Spooler CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Section 6 GFK 0499 The Fault Table Module provides you with two screens for displaying the PLC and I O fault tables maintained by the Series 90 CPU These screens are virtually identical to those supported by the Logicmaster 90 Programming and Configuration software packages The fault table module may be accessed from within your ADS operator interface system See Chapter 14 of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Reference manual GFK 0641 for more details on the operation of the Fault Table Module The basic PID Module provides you with three screens for viewing and manipulating PID loop data resident in the Series 90 CPU These screens include a configuration screen
301. t Terminal Selections menu entry on page 2 and press the Enter key or just press the T key The following will be displayed on your computer screen CIMPLICITY Ctm gt 98 ADS Setup Utility l Version 4 61 HOST COMPUTER SELECTIONS Monochrome Generic ASCII Printer Normal IBM Character Set Target Terminal Selections TARGET TERMINAL COM2 Terminal Connected To tea COM1 Terminals Sup comz MIBM TEL Not Included TARGET PRINTER MINI TBL Not Included Printers Supp TCOIT TBL Not Included TMOIT TBL Not Included UT166 TBL Not Included LUDCO TBL Not Included Use the cursor keys to select the desired choice of either COM1 or COM2 and then press the Enter key If you need to use either the MIBM MINI TCOIT TMOIT VT100 or LUDCO terminal table see table 5 2 above you will also need to include it here Again the cursor keys are used to select either Included or Not Included and pressing the Enter key registers the choice 5 12 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Once you have made any necessary changes you should exit the ADS set up package To do this either use the cursor keys to go to the Leave Setup menu entry and then press the Enter key or press the L key If you have made any changes to the selections you will be prompted to confirm that you want to save them CIMPLICITY Ctm gt 98 ADS Setup Utility l Version 4 61
302. t use the PCOP communications software for that The same ADS installation process you followed to initially install the ADS software will need to be followed again to install the changes Refer to Chapter 5 for details on using PCOP to install the ADS software onto the ADC module Note that when installing the ADS software subsequent to a previous installation that only the changes you have made are updated to the module Therefore subsequent installations normally take much less time to accomplish than the initial installation Also note that any user system resident on the ADC module s RAM disk will be unaffected by the software installation process CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Chapter 8 Section 1 GFK 0499 ADS Off Line PC Based Builder A version of the ADS Builder is hosted on an IBM PC or compatible computer allowing you to build systems for any of the supported target terminal types Based on your computer equipment and the target terminal you are building the system for you may need to change the default settings in effect for the PC based Builder See chapter 7 Section 6 Specifying the Host Computer for how to properly specify host computer settings which impact the operation of the PC based Builder Note that a version of the ADS Builder may be loaded onto the ADC module when the development mode is installed on the ADC module The ADC based version
303. ter and download it to the ADC module Section 1 Installing CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software Onto Your Computer Open the shrink wrapped package labeled PCM DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE fillout the registration form included in the package and mail it today to ensure that your software is registered with GE Fanuc The PCM development software PCOP is the communications software used to communicate with the ADC module Its purpose is to install the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software onto the ADS module and to load save and archive your database system Insert the PCM Development Software PCOP diskette into drive A of your computer At the MS DOS prompt type the following A INSTALL Note STEP 3 above installs the PCOP Development Software onto your hard disk This software is required when using the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software If you already have PCOP installed perform this step anyway to make sure that you have the most recent version of PCOP installed on your hard disk GFK 0499 5 1 The following PCOP Installation Program screen will be displayed GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC PCOP c INSTALLATION PROGRAM COPYRIGHT c 1988 GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA INC Published in a limited copyright sense and all rights including trade secret rights are reserved Unauthorized use of the information or program is strictly prohibited Installation of this software reaffirms acceptance of the terms and conditions of the
304. text on the screen Position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 5 14 gt and press the F3 key to begin the selection of the region move the cursor first to position lt 5 79 gt and then to position lt 8 79 gt Press the F5 key to draw the desired rectangle DD MM YY H MM SS 999 Deg F 32 21D Edit degrees F VALUE IS XXXXXXXX Cstatus style VALVE IS xCLOSED Cannunciator style OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE 999 Deg C CA 100 gt UIEN CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C ALARM ALARM ALL PAGE PAGE ALARMS TUTOR 1 Rou J Col Text Static A video attribute or attributes may be applied during the process of drawing a rectangle When we have completed our system we will want to use the OPEN VALVE and CLOSE VALVE areas as touch points so we want to make them appear to stand out as buttons One effective way to do this is to place a reverse video rectangle around the text giving it the illusion of a raised labeled button Using the techniques learned from previous steps we first need to activate the reverse video attribute Press the F1 key for the video attributes menu and select Reverse You should see the Re designation in the status area of the screen Now position the cursor at lt row column gt position lt 9 43 gt and press the F3 key to begin selection of the region then move the cursor first to position lt 9 54 gt and then down to position lt 1
305. the numeric keypad TUTOR 988 Row Col Text Static Press the Alt F1 key to turn off the reverse video attribute returning to normal video Then type in the indicated text as the button labels TUTOR 900 Row Col Text Static GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 115 6 116 Press the key sequence Insert Delete to begin defining the touch point key codes refer to Appendix B Note that the entire touch point matrix may be defined not just those touch points which will be covered by the numeric keypad This is done so that defined touch point areas on other screens will be disabled while the current screen is displayed Type in the decimal key code values as shown below Numeric keys 0 through 9 are specified by key codes 48 through 57 Ctrl X functions to clear a field it is associated with keycode 24 When editing the F10 key is temporarily redefined to indicate that field input should be canceled it is associated with keycode 137 Likewise the decimal point is associated with keycode 46 the minus sign with 45 and the Enter key with 13 gaar N E e After completing the touch point definitions press the Alt F10 key to save the screen you will then be returned to the screen operations menu CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 6 Defining the Function Keys Alth
306. the current listing options selected appears in the upper right hand portion of the screen The response for all these fields is either Y or N Y indicates that the information will be included in the listing and N indicates that the information will not be included in the listing If the System Summary Listing is not selected the inline xref and expanded info fields are automatically set N These two fields are indented indicating they are a subset of the System Summary Listing The print options and listing options information is saved in an environment file If any of these parameters are changed the change does not affect the setting of the parameter in the environment file Changes are lost when the Adsxref Utility is exited in this sense changes are temporary The changes can be made permanent by saving the changes to the environment which is available under print options Asummary of the system appears in the lower left hand portion of the screen as it does in the builder A menu of the adsxref functions appear in the lower right hand side of the screen You can either use the and keys to select the desired option and then press the Enter key or you can press the key corresponding to the first character of the first word of the desired menu option Interactive search Note The Interactive search option is not implemented in this release of CIMPLICITY 90 ADS CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual
307. the cursor to either of these entries a field will appear where you can enter the appropriate characters Printer control sequences are issued immediately before and after a listing This feature can be used to put the printer into a particular mode for example compressed output returning to the original mode after the listing is finished From 0 to 255 characters can be specified To enter non printing characters use a backslash followed by the three digit decimal equivalent of the ASCII code for the character s For example to identify the Escape character lt Esc gt you would enter 027 A leading zero is required If you need to enter the backslash character itself enter two backslashes GFK 0499 Chapter 10 The ADS Cross Reference Utility 10 9 Designate Print Destination When the Designate print destination option is selected a data entry window is opened containing two fields which can be set by the user Port and File name ADS CROSS REFERENCE Current Database coit Current Folder ads_pc tutor pcm Database Status Up To Date Print Destina PRINT DESTINATION Listing Forma Port LPT1 COM1 LPTZ2 COMNZ FILE File Name screens alarm pages reports alarm sources Printer setup data sources display formats System listing options translation entries PID listing option eng units conversions Xref listing options lookup table entries Write print options to file command scripts Port
308. to the Logicmaster 90 70 Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0263 4 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS package IC697ADS701 which includes An Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module ADC to install catalog number 1C697ADC701 for a Series 90 70 PLC CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software Manual GFK 0449 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual PCM Utility software PCOP IC641SWP061 and User s Manual The following three RS 232 cables IC690CBL701 for a Workmaster industrial computer IC690CBL702 for an IBM PC AT or compatible personal computer IC690CBL705 for a Workmaster II or an IBM PersonalSystem 2 personal computer 5 One of the following terminals or computers GE Fanuc OIT color or monochrome Mini or Mini Touch Screen OIT VT100 compatible terminal Workmaster or IBM PC XT computer with a monochrome or color display Workmaster II or IBM PC AT PS 2 or compatible computer with a monochrome or color display Nematron 12 color OptiTOUCH terminal IWS 1511T or IWS 1513T Nematron 12 monochrome OptiTOUCH terminal IWS 1011T or IWS 1013T Lucas Deeco ST 2200 terminal The steps required for installing the ADC module configuring the ADC module connecting and setting up external hardware and installing the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software in the appropriate PLC system are described in the following sections The first st
309. troductionto CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Section 1 Product Summary The CIMPLICITY 90 ADS catalog number IC697ADS701 for Series 90 70 catalog number IC693ADS301 for Series 90 30 is a low cost character based operator interface generator system for use with Series 90 70 and Series 90 30 Model 331 PLCs The ease of use of the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software package makes it very attractive and easy to use for all levels of operators even those with minimal computer experience User programming is not required to create an operator interface system Entry of data is easy it is entered by following a progression of self explanatory screens with simple fill in the blanks data entry forms Your screens are created using a simple built in text editor Since no user programming is required ADS is an attractive alternative to producing specialized MegaBasic or OptiBASIC programmed solutions It s lower cost and simpler operation as compared to CIMPLICITY models I W D and U make it well suited for those applications which do not need the high level bit mapped graphics and capabilities of the other CIMPLICITY models External Interface GFK 0499 The CIMPLICITY 90 ADS software runs on the Series 90 70 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor ADC module catalog number IC697ADC701 or the Series 90 30 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module catalog number IC693ADC311 Both modules have two serial ports for connection to external devices Port 1 is used
310. ts a sample Series 90 70 PLC system Z COPY REF VU DELETE UNDEL th20 iofeaseniusfeben Eps Ercksel icon By ther a o RACK J 4 5 6 CONFIGURATION CPU 731 ADC 701 BEM 713 OFFLINE NFOLDERS MAN_ 70 PRG MAN_70 CONFIG VALID REPLACE 2 8 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 Move the cursor to the slot where you have an ADC module installed STEP 4 Press F8 other STEP 5 Press F4 oi This abbreviation stands for Operator Interface Choose IC697ADC701 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Depending on your version of Logicmaster 90 70 software the module name may be Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor or Access 90 Display Coprocessor however the catalog number will always be IC697ADC701 Module names may sometimes change catalog numbers DO NOT change so you should always select modules in the configuration by their catalog number Note Repeat steps 3 4 5 and 6 for each ADC module you have installed STEP 7 Press the ESC key to exit this screen This will also automatically SAVE this configuration to disk Note You do not have the ability to zoom into this module all module configuration will be downloaded with the ADS software This will be discussed later in this chapter CONFIG VALID is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen after the configuration is successfully validated When CONFIG INVALID is displayed the
311. tup screen should be set to 1 as shown below ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate 1 Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate a Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN BG s 58 s Screens Alarm pages Reports I Alarm sources Modify System Params Data sources System Name TUTOR Display formats Terminal TMINI Translations entries Terminal Device COM2 Eng Unit Conv entries Printer Device NULL Lookup table entries Default Scan rate Command scripts Default Alarm Scan rate Startup screen Pressing the Enter key completes the data entry form and returns you to the configuration operations menu 6 120 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Saving the System to Disk Now we are ready to save our system in preparation for actually copying the system to the ADC module Press the Esc key to return to the main menu and then select Load Save Operations ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen ADS Print Destination STDPRN Terminal TMINI lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate B8 s 58 s Screens Alarm pages Reports Alarm sources Data sources Display formats Translations entries Eng Unit Conv entries Lookup table entries Command scripts Save sy
312. u lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 62 GFK 0499 Chapter 5 Installing the CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Software 5 5 To access the ADS menu first press the gt key to highlight it DER Digital Event Recorder ADS CIMPLICITY lt tm 98 ADS EXIT Return to LM9 Main Menu lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press Home for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 02 Pressing the Enter key will pull down or open the ADS menu of available options CHE EXIT PCOP ADS DER Digital Event Recorder ADSSETUP ADS CIMPLICITY tm gt 98 ADS TERMSET CREATHLP EXIT Return to LM9 Main Menu XREF TERMF lt lt Use cursor keys to select item Press Enter to execute choice gt gt lt lt Cor press key corresponding to first letter of menu choice gt lt lt Press Esc to close menu window Press CHome for HELP on choices gt gt Operator Interface Products Menu Version 1 62 To execute a particular menu option use the T and J cursor keys to highlight the option and then press the
313. uld be accessed This will be possible at runtime only if you selected the Fault Module option with the ADSSETUP Utility and subsequently installed it on the ADC module using PCOP An optional foreground and background color specification may be specified within the parentheses Function key F2 performs the same function as described for function key F1 above except access is provided to the I O fault table ADS supports the concept of multiple screens being displayed on the screen simultaneously Each of these screens will have its own set of function key assignments The last screen displayed on the target terminal will be the one whose function keys are active Thus we need to provide a mechanism for removing the OPTIONS screen from the terminal while reactivating the MAIN screen s function keys This is accomplished by the POPSCN 100 command assigned to function key F14 The EXIT command assigned to function key F15 performs the same function as its assignment to function key F15 on the main screen The Enter key is used to complete the key assignments data entry form GFK 0499 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 59 6 60 Creating an Alarm Page Use the Esc key to return to the Builder s main menu and from there select the Alarm Operations menu Execute the New Alarm Page option and fill out the alarm page s data entry form per the following ADS BUILDER Current S
314. urn to the Standard Menu Items screen Then press the F6 key to access the serial port 1 configuration screen Any of the settings for port 1 may be changed on this screen The settings for Port 2 may be accessed in turn by pressing the F2 key DEFLTS BASIC ccn PORTS LEDS HWID ADUNCD hort ipport Ze init OO Press TAB Shft TAB to Select Std Data Rate for this Serial Port Data Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Parity pihy ODD EVEN NONE Flow Control g iyUDi NONE HARDWARE SOFTWARE Stop Bits 1 2 Bits Char 7 8 CAUTION This Data is IGNORED if CCM is Enabled on This Port INSERT PCM ID File Read PC C NPCOPNADS PCMNADS CDF MURDI FACTORY C ADS_PCNTEST PCM ODIFIED RACK J SLOT A PLC ID gfefepl Note If any changes are made to the Port 1 settings and you plan to load or save systems via the ADS Builder the typical case then you will also need to make the same changes to PCOPs configuration file Refer the information on Using TERMSET at the end of this appendix GFK 0499 Appendix D Changing Default Port Settings D 3 D 4 After making the required changes to the serial port settings press the Shift F10 key sequence to access the Advanced Menu Items screen Then from this screen press the F9 key to access the Write Configuration to a File screen The ADS configuration file C PCOP ADS PCM ADS CDKisspecifiedforwriting STASK
315. utorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 15 80 WHITE Dynamic Object DEG_C_BAR Start Row 4 End Row 14 69 Start Column 30 End Column 32 Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc Display Format NORMAL_HIGH Display Value No Avail for Edit No Dynamic Object DEG_F_VALUE Start Row 5 End Row 5 5 Start Column 3 End Column 5 TEMPERATURE Additional Calc DEGC_TO_DEGF Display Format Data Source Display Value Yes Left_justify Avail for Edit Yes Min 32 Max 212 Dynamic Object VALVE_ANNUN Start Row 7 End Row 7 79 Start Column 42 End Column 58 Data Source VALVE Additional Calc Display Format OFF_ON Display Value No Avail for Edit No 58 6 147 Diranna E E E terete ete ete E EEEE TUTOR AN ADS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM TUTOR AN ADS DEMONSTRATION SYSTEM 100 DD MMM YY HH MM SS 999 Deg F 32 212 A Pe rg a a A N Ey Edit degrees F z VALVE IS XXXXXXXX status style Di VALVE IS CLOSED annunciator style E B soda Tal int Taha aa adic daca ara cn al aa Bow G A 4 4 R OPEN VALVE CLOSE VALVE 10 cC I 999 Deg C 0 100 VIEW CLOSE ACK OPTIONS Edit degrees C 0 ALARM ALARM ALL MENU toa PAGE PAGE ALARMS Kegefinitions AK1 PSHSCN 900 DYN_EDIT 1 DEG_F_VALUE REVERSE POPSCN 900 AK2 PSHSCN 900 DYN_EDIT 1 DEG_C_VALUE REVERSE POPSCN 900 AK
316. verifying that all of the MODULE OK LEDs are ON you must tell the PLC CPU that the modules are there This is done by configuring the ADCs using Logicmaster 90 software You should now go on to Section 2 of this chapter for instructions on how to configure the ADC module using the Logicmaster 90 Programming Software package Troubleshooting After completing the above steps to install the ADC and replace and or connect the battery when power is turned on the MODULE OK OK LED should be on steady If it is not the problem may be either that the LED is burned out or the board has not passed diagnostics Use the following procedure to determine the cause of the problem 6 Make sure that power to the rack is on the PLC is okay and that the ADC is seated properly 7 Power off and then back on or hard reset the ADC Try to access the ADC using PCOP refer to page 5 10 for more information You should enter PCOP and verify that the ONLINE indication is displayed at the bottom of the screen If PCOP goes ONLINE then the problem is simply a burned out LED 8 Power off and remove the battery short out the circuit board connector leads with a screwdriver This will delete everything from the battery backed RAM All user programs and files will be deleted Because memory can be maintained through the backplane connection on the Series 90 70 ADC you may need to physically remove the module from the rack Then reconnect the battery power up
317. verting a version 1 system to version 2 ail pin assignments and cabling C 1 terminal setup A 1 B Block diagram ADS configuration 1 2 Builder option Builder PC based Index Building your system before creating first screen before you start 8 C Cable requirements p d Cable WYE Series 90 30 ADC C 4 Cables pre wired Cabling information Capacity product Catalog number descriptions IC600KD534 4 1 1C641SWP771 1 3 2 2 B 2 Changing default port settings D 1 CIBM A 3 el 90 ADS software installing 5 1 CIMPLICITY_90 ADS software down loading 5 14 Color IBM PC installation of Color OIT terminal installation of 4 2 COM1 port selection COM2 port selection Command line flags Index 1 Index Index 2 Communication ports Series 90 30 3 5 Communication ports Series 90 70 Components of ADS software ls aon with Logicmaster 90 30 3 8 Configuration with Logicmaster 90 70 software Configuration PCOP Connector serial port k Control sequences for printer setup eye Version 1 system to version 2 E 1 Cross reference utility exit 10 20 file operations print options running 10 1 start printout Customizing ADS development environ ment Pa Customizing ADS execute only environ ment 7 4 D Data sources number of 1 3 Database printing option 7 5 Default port settings Default settings serial
318. ween the ADC module and the CPU module must be occupied If any of these slots are empty the ADC module will not be able to communicate across the backplane to the Series 90 70 PLC CPU Slide the ADC completely into the card guide in the slot The three LEDs will be at the top of the board Align the board with the connector on the rack backplane and slide it towards the connector until it has started to seat Place one thumb on the left side of the top plastic flange and the other thumb on the left side of the bottom plastic flange Push the board into the connector until the top and bottom latches click onto the rack rails Visually inspect the board to be sure that it has seated properly CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Before turning on power to the Series 90 70 PLC set the CPU Run Stop switch to STOP This will prevent your application program if any from initiating any command that may affect the operation of the ADC module Power up the PLC rack The top green LED MODULE OK on the faceplate of the ADC module will flash during power up diagnostics Once the ADC is ready this LED will stop flashing and remain ON If the LED continues to flash or does not come on refer to the Troubleshooting information for help Repeat this procedure for each ADC module that you wish to install Congratulations you have now completed installing your Series 90 70 ADC module or modules After
319. wing instructions Grasp the module firmly with the terminal board toward you and with the rear hook facing away from you The three LEDs will be at the top of the board e Align the ADC module with the desired baseplate slot and connector Tilt the module upwards so that the top rear hook of the module engages the slot on the baseplate Swing the module downward until the module and baseplate connectors mate and the lock lever on the bottom of the module snaps into place fully engaging the baseplate notch e Visually inspect the module to be sure that it it properly seated a43055 Figure 3 3 Inserting a Module CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Power up the PLC rack The top green LED MODULE OK on the faceplate of the ADC module will flash during power up diagnostics Once the ADC is ready this LED will stop flashing and remain ON If the LED continues to flash or does not come on refer to the Troubleshooting information for help Repeat this procedure for each ADC module that you want to install The maximum number of ADC modules you can install in a Series 90 30 PLC system is 4 only ina Model 331 or Model 341 Troubleshooting After completing the above steps to install the ADC and replace and or connect the battery when power is turned on the MODULE OK OK LED should be on steady If it is not the problem may be either that the LED is burned out or the board
320. wn in figure 2 1 are mounted along the top front edge of the ADC board Module OK OK LED The MODULE OK LED indicates the current status of the ADC board It has three possible conditions Off When the LED is off the ADC is not functioning This is the result of a hardware malfunction i e the diagnostic checks detect a failure the ADC fails or the PLC is not present Corrective action is required in order to get the ADC functioning again On When the LED is steady on the ADC is functioning properly Normally this LED should always be on indicating that the diagnostic tests were successfully completed and the configuration data for the module is good Flashing The LED flashes during power up diagnostics Note The ADC has a watchdog timer that is periodically reset by the ADC software If the watchdog timer expires the ADC will cease functioning and the MODULE OK BD OK LED will turn off Serial Port Activity LEDs PORT 1 and PORT 2 The other two LED indicators PORT 1 PORT 1 ACTIVE and PORT 2 PORT 2 ACTIVE blink to indicate activity on the two serial ports PORT 1 blinks when port 1 either sends or receives data PORT 2 blinks when port 2 either sends or receives data CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Restart Reset Pushbutton The Restart Reset pushbutton on the front of the ADC board is a multifunction pushbutton which can be pressed to use a different fun
321. xample Action AlarmSource UNLATCHED Data Type STATE Location Z2 0 Scan Rate Additional Calc Alarm Pages 1 Flags Timestamp Range ON Text Unlatched example Action Alarm Source LATCHED Data Type STATE Location Z2 0 Scan Rate 5 Additional Calc Alarm Pages 1 Flags Timestamp Latched Range ON Text Latched example Action LATCHED_CMDS Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 151 DATA SOURCE LISTING DataSource IO_FAULTS Data Source PLC_DATE Data Type BYTE Data Type LONGWORD Location PLC_STATUS 5 PLC_STATUS 3 Location DATE Scan Rate Scan Rate 00 00 01 00 Additional Calc STATUS_TEXT Additional Calc Data Source PLC_FAULTS Data Source PLC_TIME Data Type BYTE Data Type LONGWORD Location PLC_STATUS 4 PLC_STATUS 2 Location TIME Scan Rate Scan Rate 00 00 01 00 Additional Calc STATUS_TEXT Additional Calc Data Source TEMPERATURE Data Source VALVE Data Type WORD Data Type STATE Location Z1 Location 22 0 Scan Rate Scan Rate Additional Calc Additional Calc DISPLAY FORMAT LISTING Displaywrormat NORMAL_HIGH Display Format OFF_ON Data Type WORD Data Type STATE Range Action Range Action 0 79 NORMAL OFF NORMAL 80 100 BOLD ON REVERSE Displaywormat STATUS_STRNG Data Type STRING Range Action TABLE HAS FAULT S REVERSE TABLE HAS NEW FAULT REVERSE BLINK NO FAULTS I
322. y special operator intervention The one exception to this will be if the operator presses the Cancel button to cancel data entry for the current field In this case the numeric keypad will remain displayed and will require a second press of the cancel button to remove it from the display The command used to remove a screen from the display is POPSCN with the screen number to be removed placed in parentheses Screen number 0 refers to the screen at the top of the display which in this case will be screen 900 900 could have been explicitly entered as the screen number instead of 0 for this case ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Screen key assignments for NUMKEYPD C9808 POPSCNC Pressing the Alt F10 key completes the key definitions for screen 900 and returns you to the screen operations menu ADS BUILDER Current System Name TUTOR Terminal TMINI lt C0M2 gt Default Scan Rate 1 Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate a Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Screens ADS Print Destination STDPRN BG s 58 s MAIN C 15x NUMKEYPD 980 New screen Modify screen Screen paint Delete screen Copy screen List screens Print screen details Touch screen assignments Key assignments updated 6 118 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 GFK 0499 6 Select the Key Assignments menu option again and this time s
323. y NONE stop bits 1 bits char 8 comm port COM2 data mask FF Hex PCOP dflt PCM 90 70 Please enter one of the following numbers change data rate change flow control technique change parity change stop bits change bits per character change communications port change received character mask change default PCOP PCM connection 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 lt gt exit to previous menu Your selection please 7 GFK 0499 Appendix D Changing Default Port Settings D 9 To change the designation for which type of ADC you plan to communicate with press the 8 key Note that the PCOP default toggles to now indicate PCM 90 30 The setup for the serial port is data rate 19200 flow ctrl HARDWARE parity NONE stop bits 1 bits char 8 comm port COM2 data mask FF Hex PCOP dflt PCM 90 30 Please enter one of the following numbers change data rate change flow control technique change parity change stop bits change bits per character change communications port change received character mask change default PCOP PCM connection aANOO ARON exit to previous menu Your selection please Press the E key to return to the main menu screen TERMSET u 2 27 Please select the desired function BASIC SETUP display change comm port settings display change video adapter settings CUSTOM CONFIGURATIONS display change keyboard settings display change attribut
324. y area Following that the screen values are again scanned and the screen refreshed with the new values Considering that some roundoff error occurred in the conversion the just entered temperature of 75 F changes to read 73 29 Feb 88 20 54 11 73 Deg F C32 212 VALVE IS 0PEN lt status style Fi edit degrees F VALUE IS CLOSED Cannunciator style 23 Deg C cO 100 F4 Open valve F5 Close valve F2 edit degrees C View Alarm Page Close Alarm Page Acknowledge Alarms Options Menu 6 72 CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 SCREENDETAILS LISTING ScreenNumber 1 MAIN Start Row 1 End Row 23 Start Column 1 End Column 80 Image NORMAL Background BLACK Foreground WHITE Dynamic Object DATE_DISPLAY Dynamic Object DEG_C_BAR Start Row 4 End Row 4 Start Row 4 End Row 14 Start Column 61 End Column 69 Start Column 30 End Column 32 Data Source PLC_DATE Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Yes Avail for Edit No Dynamic Object DEG_C_VALUE End Row 10 End Column 4 Start Row 10 Start Column 2 Data Source TEMPERATURE Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Yes Avail for Edit Yes Min 0 Max 100 Left_justify Dynamic Object TIME_DISPLAY Start Row 4 End Row 4 Start Column 72 End Column 79 Data Source PLC_TIME Additional Calc Display Format Display Value Y
325. y to pick it for inclusion in the data source RXXRXARXARARARAAKRAR Additional Calculation DEGC_TO_DEGF Transl aac eeeee OPEN CLOSED CLookup gt Create Lookup Copy Dynamic Create Translation OPTIONS MENU the PLC Fault Table the I O Fault Table x Name IO FLT STAT Create EUC Data Source IOQ_FAULTS Additional Calc Create a data s Name IO_FAULTS Source Data Type BYTE Source Location PLC_STATUSLS Scan Rate x Additional Calc Press the key sequence Insert Delete to begin defining the touch point areas View the PLC fault table will be assigned the keycode 128 F1 View the I O fault table 129 Chapter 6 Development Tutorial Creating Your First Operator Interface System 6 131 6 132 F2 Return to the main screen 141 F14 and Exit the system and hard reset the ADC module 142 F15 4 OPTIONS MENU 129 428 ied the PLC Fault Table fied the I O Fault Table XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXX HXXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXX 110 a E 41 Exit the system and hard reset the ADC module 142 142 142 142 After completing the touch point definitions the OPTIONS screen is now complete Press the Alt F10 key to exit the screen painter while saving the work you have done Select the Key Assignments menu option specifying the newly created screen 100 Fill out the key assignments a
326. ystem It also contains information on TERMF the terminal emulation software package Appendix B ASCII Codes Provides a list of standard ASCII codes Appendix C Serial Port Pin Assignments and Cabling Diagrams Describes the pin assignments for the serial ports for both the Series 90 70 and Series 90 30 ADC module and provides the information required to build serial cables for the system Appendix D Changing Default Port Settings Describes how to change the serial port settings to parameters other than the default settings CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 Preface Appendix E Converting a Version 1 System to Version 2 Describes how to convert systems created with the 1 01 1 02 1 03 or 1 04 ADS software to the new form needed with Version 2 or later ADS software GFK 0499 Preface vii Preface Related Publications GFK 0641 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual Provides the reference information for each sub menu which allows you to build your own operator interface system It also tells you how to execute a system once it has been built and saved GFK 0255 Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor and Support Software User s Manual Provides information required for configuration programming and operation of the Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module PCM GFK 0262 Series 90 70 Programmable Controller Installation Manual Provides the
327. ystem Name TUTOR Terminal COIT CCOM2 gt Default Scan Rate B8 s Printer CNULL gt Default Alarm Scan Rate 58s Dir ADS_PC TUTOR PCM Startup Screen Alarm Pages ADS Print Destination STDPRN Waa New alarm page Create an alarm page Name ULU_ALRM Number 1 Starting Row 6 Rous 10 Starting Column 9 Columns 39 Foreground WHITE Background BLACK Heading AUR ET aos Analarm page is a special type of screen that is used to display alarm information and optionally allow the operator to interact with it to view and acknowledge particular alarms It has no key assignments of its own function key assignments providing for manipulation of the alarm page must be provided by the topmost screen on the display The actual alarms themselves are not specified here they will be created next Completing the alarm page data entry form will return you to the Alarm Operations menu CIMPLICITY90 ADS Alphanumeric Display System User s Manual March 1994 GFK 0499 6 Creating an Alarm Source Select the Alarm Sources menu entry which displays an additional set of menu options Execute the New Alarm Source option and fill out the alarm source s data entry form as shown in the following screen ADS BUILDER Create an alarm source Name UNLATCHED Source Data Type STATE PLC Location Z2 Scan Rate or HH MM SS CC gt Additional Calc Range ON Action Text Unlatched example Range Action

6 - GE Intelligent Platforms: Support Home

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents